Home

H8SX E6000H Emulator User`s Manual

image

Contents

1. Break area bus Access size Address 3 32 bit 8 bit 16 bit 32 bit D31 D31 D31 D31 Byte D 00 Do po LD po D po LD D31 D31 D31 D31 D 01 D D Do po _D Do Do D31 D31 D31 D31 10 D D Do po LD voL D Do D31 D31 D31 D31 D 11 D vo D oo D Do Do D31 DO D31 D31 D31 Word 00 D1 DO DO Do po D1 DO po D1 po D1 D31 D31 D31 D31 01 D1 DO DO D1 D1 Do vo D1 DO Do DO Do D31 D31 D31 D31 DO 10 D1 DO DO po D1 po D1 DO po D1 Do D31 DO D31 D31 D31 p n D1 po D1 po D1 Do0 oo DO Do DO D31 D0 D31 D31 D31 DO D1 D1 00 Long wore Dal D2 D0 D2 po D3 po D3 D2 D1 DO po D3 D1 po D3 D31 Dol 23 D31 D31 DI 01 D3 D2 D1 D3 D1 D3 w D2 po D3 D2 D1 D0 oo D2 D0 Do DO D31 Dol D31 D31 D31 D2 10 D1 D3 D2 D2 D0 DO po D3 po D3 D2 D1 DO po D3 D1 Do D1 D31 D1 D31 D31 D31 D3 11 D2 DO DO D3 D1 D1 po
2. Break area bus Access size Address z i 32 bit 8 bit 16 bit 32 bit D31 D31 D31 D31 Byte D D 00 D Do po D Do Do D31 D31 D31 D31 01 D D Do oo D o D Do D31 D31 D31 D31 10 D D D Do po D Do Do D31 D31 D31 D31 11 vo D oo D oo D o D D31 DO D31 D31 D31 DO Word 00 D1 D1 DO Do po DO D1 po D1 Do D31 D31 D31 D31 01 DO DO D1 D1 D1 Do po DO D1 po DO Do D31 D31 D31 D31 10 DO DO DO no D1 po DO D1 po D1 po D1 D31 DI D31 D31 D31 Di n D1 po DO po DO D1 vo DO po DO 031 D0 D31 D31 031 59 D1 D1 0 Long wore 9 D2 Do D2 D2 po D3 po DO D1 D2 D3 vo D1 D3 vo D3 D31 pa 23 D31 D31 D3 Do DO 01 D1 D1 D3 D1 Do D2 po DO D1 D2 D3 po DO D2 Do D2 D31 D2 D31 D31 D31 D2 10 D3 DS DO Do D2 DO po D1 po DO D1 D2 D3 po D1 D3 po D1 D31 D1 D31 D31 D31 D1 11 D2 D2 D3 D1 D3 D3 po DO po DO D1 D2 D3 oo DO0 D2 po DO Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 146 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product Table 5 5 User Bus and Break Setting for an Output of Data Little Endian
3. VCC User system MCU interface cable VHCT125 47 kQ P11 to P13 P11 to P13 P30 to P33 gt P30 to P33 P61 P62 P61 P62 PA3 to PA7 PA3 to PA7 PDO to PD7 VHC125 PDO to PD7 PEO to PE7 PEO to PE7 PHO to PH7 PHO to PH7 Pld to PI7 A P14 to PI7 Compression circuit P40 to P47 P40 to P47 P50 to P55 P50 to P55 Avcc Avcc 0 022 uF Avss ji Avss 0 022 uF 27 KQ AVref AVref RY Sub MCU O P56 P57 O P56 P57 Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 3 RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 21 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications VCC User system MCU interface cable VHCT125 47 KQ PZA 10 P27 i 9 P24 to P27 VHC125 lt 9 CB3Q3306 VCC User system MCU iia interface cable VHCT125 P10 P10 P60 gt P60 VHC125 O E i CB3Q3306 iko a VCC User system MCU interface cable VHCT125 47 KQ P14 to P17 P14 to P17 VHC125 a PCA9306 1kQ Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 4 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 22 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications VCC MCU User system VHCT125 Hie inte
4. 1 Comment 2 ADD_FILE AF Adds a file to the current project 3 ANALYSIS AN Enables or disables performance analysis 4 ANALYSIS_RANGE AR Sets or displays a performance analysis range 5 ANALYSIS_RANGE_ AD Deletes a performance analysis range DELETE 6 ASSEMBLE AS Assembles instructions into memory 7 ASSERT Checks if an expression is true or false 8 AUTO_COMPLETE AC Enables or disables the auto complete function 9 BREAKPOINT_ONCHIP BC Displays on chip breakpoints sets sequential breaks and sets PtoP time measurement 10 BREAKPOINT_ONCHIPn BCn Sets on chip breakpoint of each channel 11 BREAKPOINT_ONCHIP BCC Clears on chip breakpoints _CLEAR 12 BREAKPOINT_ONCHIP BCE Enables or disables an on chip breakpoint _ENABLE 13 BREAKPOINT_ BE Displays on emulator breakpoints ONEMULATOR 14 BREAKPOINT_ BEn Sets on emulator breakpoint of each channel ONEMULATORn 15 BREAKPOINT_ BEC Clears on emulator breakpoints ONEMULATOR_CLEAR 16 BREAKPOINT_ BEE Enables or disables an on emulator breakpoint ONEMULATOR_ ENABLE 17 BREAKPOINT_ BS Sets a software breakpoint SOFTWARE 18 BREAKPOINT_ BSC Clears software breakpoints SOFTWARE_CLEAR 19 BREAKPOINT_ BSE Enables or disables a software breakpoint SOFTWARE_ENABLE 20 BUILD BU Performs a build on the current project 21 BUILD_ALL BL Performs a build all on the current project 22 CHANGE_ cc Sets the current configuration CONFIGURATION 23 CHANGE_PROJECT C
5. User I F 2 Pin No Signal Name User I F 2 Pin No Signal Name UCN2 61 UCN2 90 62 91 63 92 64 93 VSS_68 65 94 66 95 67 96 68 VSS_65 97 69 98 WDTOVF 70 99 71 100 VSS_69 72 101 73 102 74 103 75 104 76 105 VSS_70 77 VSS_66 106 78 107 79 108 80 109 VSS_71 81 110 82 VSS_67 111 83 112 VSS_72 84 113 85 114 86 115 87 116 88 117 89 118 VSS_73 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 18 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H cont User I F 2 Pin No Signal Name User I F 2 Pin No Signal Name UCN2 119 UCN2 146 120 147 VSS_79 121 Vcc 148 122 VSS_74 149 123 150 124 151 125 152 VSS_80 126 153 127 VSS_75 154 128 155 129 156 130 157 VSS_81 131 158 132 VSS_76 159 133 160 134 161 135 162 VSS_82 136 163 137 VSS_77 164 138 165 139 166 140 167 VSS_83 141 168 142 VSS_78 169 143 170 144 171 145 172 VSS_84 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009
6. Ew O i a To SY Setting On Chip Read write X Figure 3 5 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog Box Use this dialog box to change the address range and attributes of a memory map From Enter the start address of the map range To Enter the end address of the map range Setting Enter the memory map setting The choices given are listed below The User external memory and Emulator emulation memory attributes can be modified e On Chip Read write Cannot be changed e On Chip Read only Cannot be changed e On Chip Guarded Cannot be changed e User Read write Selects an external area that is readable writable Cannot be selected when the single chip mode is selected e User Read only Selects an external area that is write protected Cannot be selected when the single chip mode is selected e User Guarded Selects an external area that is access prohibited e Emulator Read write Sets readable writable emulation memory as an external area e Emulator Read only Sets write protected emulation memory as an external area e Emulator Guarded Sets access prohibited emulation memory as an external area e No access area Space that includes no memory Emulation memory can be used as replacement of a ROM or flash memory on the user system When the user program accesses to an access prohibited area or writes to a write protected area a break occurs due to the illegal access The user can set the Configuration P
7. Appendix A Menus Appendix B Command Limes csisesscssoccdssssatesssncusestcassacasveeenasstpnsvasses tances adair iaie ERE ariki iE 161 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page IX of X RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page X of X REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS H8SX 1650 Hardware Part Section 1 Overview 11 you A Section 1 Overview Notes on Usage Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Check all components with the component list after unpacking the emulator Never place heavy objects on the casing Observe the following conditions in the area where the emulator is to be used Make sure that the internal cooling fans on the sides of the emulator must be at least 20 cm 8 away from walls or other equipment Keep out of direct sunlight or heat Refer to section 3 1 Environmental Conditions Use in an environment with constant temperature and humidity Protect the emulator from dust Avoid subjecting the emulator to excessive vibration Refer to section 3 1 Environmental Conditions Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses Before using the emulator s power supply check its specifications such as power voltage and frequency When moving the emulator take care not to subject it to strong vibration or mechanical shock Af
8. SN74CB3Q3306A SCK5 RxD5 TxD5 MCU Sub MCU SN74CB3Q3306A User system PF6 PF5 User system P65 SN74CB3Q3306A P64 P63 Figure 3 13 User System Interface Circuits with HS1638ECN61H Connected 2 RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 43 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications User system MCU 47kKQ P13 P13 EPM3256ATC ADTRGO Figure 3 14 User System Interface Circuits with HS1638ECN61H Connected 3 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 44 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU PDO PD7 PEO PE7 PJ2 PJ3 PK2 PK7 PJO PJ1 PJ4 PJ5 47 KQ SN74CBTLV3257 SN74CB3Q3306A SN74CB3Q3306A PJ6 PJ7 PKO PK1 Sub MCU TIOCA6 TIOCB6 TIOCA7 TIOCB7 TIOCA8 TIOCB8 TIOCAQ TIOCB9 PO16 PO23 PO24 PO31 User system PDO PD7 PJO PJ7 PEO PE7 PKO PK7 Figure 3 15 User System Interface Circuits with HS1668RECH61H Connected 1 RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 45 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU User system Vec P30 P31 47 kQ P34 P35 P36 P37 P20 P21 Sub MCU TIOCAO TIOCBO TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 Figure 3 16 User System Interface Circuits with HS1668RECH61H Connected 2 Rev 1
9. From To EXT 16 Detects accesses to the 16 bit EXT external memory EXT 8 Detects accesses to the 8 bit EXT external memory EMU 32 Detects accesses to the 32 bit EMU emulation memory EMU 16 Detects accesses to the 16 bit EMU emulation memory EMU 8 Detects accesses to the 8 bit EMU emulation memory Select the status of a bus Detects no bus condition when this box is checked Detects the specified bus condition PROG Detects prefetch cycles DATA Detects CPU data access cycles DMAC Detects DMAC cycles DTC Detects DTC operation STACK Detects stack cycles Select the status of probe signals Detects no probe signal condition when this box is checked Detects the specified probe signal condition Don t care Detects no selected probe condition High The status of the probe signal is high Low The status of the probe signal is low Select the status of IRQ signals Detects no IRQ signal condition when this box is checked Detects the specified IRQ signal condition Don t care Detects no selected IRQ condition High The status of the IRQ signal is high Low The status of the IRQ signal is low Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles Detects no time stamp value when this box is checked Detects the specified time stamp value Specify a single time stamp value Specify a time stamp range Enter a single time stamp value or the minimum value of the time stamp r
10. Int rnal 1 0 Parallel Test 2c nn ns c6Soo48d0e Sd cadeada eee eeee0 4 OK H8SX 1544 Register Read Write OL Register Initial Value Cheik ociccc cds a ea eee od ERER rAr OK 02 Register Write Verity 4 cccuissesdceceeeeeeeeeesentaaaaeaeees OK FPGA Parallel RAM Function 01 CHO 256Byte Arsa Check BYte w cccccciagg ec eee nenne aiaa kaaa asis OK 02 CHO 256Byte Area Check Word asecccasdaev dees deuddateeeeseeeeeees OK 03 CHO 256Byte Area Check Long Word 2 22 e eee ee eee eee OK 04 CH1 CH11 256Byte Area Check Long Word 2 ee eee OK Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 36 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Normal stopped at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Tests run for xh xmin xs Summary o 0o MO NY DU FF WN PB Tests performed 1 time s Main Board Access Emulation Board Access Evaluation Board Access Basic Function GO to BREAK Time Measurement Emulation Monitor G A Break Function G A Performance Analysis Function G A Monitor Function G A Parallel RAM Monitor G A Trace Function Combination Parallel Access H8SX 1544 Register Read Write FPGA Parallel RAM Function ooo OG SO OO Oo Oo oO oS SO OO O Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s RENESAS Shows the time when diagnostic program execution ended Shows the
11. PF7 PF6 SN74CB3Q3306A PF5 Sub MCU SCK5 RxD5 TxD5 MCU User system SN74CB3Q3306A P65 P64 SN74CB3Q3306A P63 Sub MCU Figure 3 10 User System Interface Circuits with HS1648ECH61H Connected 2 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 40 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications Vec User system P13 PB6 EPM3256ATC Sub MCU ADTRGO Figure 3 11 User System Interface Circuits with HS1648ECH61H Connected 3 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 41 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU SN74CBTLV3257 User system PDORD7 ems PDO PD7 PJ0 PJ7 PEGRE PEO PE7 PK0 PK7 SN74CB3Q3306A PJ2 PJ3 __d PK2 PK7 Vec PJO PJ1 PJ4 a7 ko SN74CB3Q3306A PJ5 g PJ6 PJ7 Li PKO PK1 Sub MCU TIOCA6 TIOCB6 TIOCA7 TIOCB7 TIOCA8 TIOCB8 TIOCA9 TIOCB9 PO16 PO23 PO24 PO31 MCU User system P30 P30 P31 P31 P34 arko P34 P35 P35 P36 P36 P37 P37 P20 P20 P21 P21 Sub MCU TIOCAO TIOCBO TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 Figure 3 12 User System Interface Circuits with HS1638ECN61H Connected 1 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 42 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU PF7 CS4 C CS5 C CS6 C CS7 C Sub MCU SN74CB3Q3306A H
12. 3 Connect Vcc to the user system power The emulator monitors and determines whether the user system is turned on or off by the following Vcc pins a Connecting the dedicated connector for HS 1650EPH60H Pin UCN2 121 b Connecting the user system interface board Vcc All Vcc pins Accordingly after connecting the user system to the emulator be sure to supply power to the Vcc pins Otherwise the emulator assumes that the user system is not connected When the user system is connected check that the power of the user system is supplied to these pins Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 21 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 6 Connecting the External Probe Not Supported in this Emulator CAUTION Check the external probe direction and connect the external probe to the emulator station correctly Incorrect connection will damage the probe or connector When an external probe is connected to the emulator probe connector on the E6000H evaluation chip board s rear panel it enables external signal tracing and multibreak detection Figure 2 5 shows the external probe connector External probe External probe connector Pin No Probe Name Signal Name Note 1 1 Probe input 0 Synchronous break 2 2 Probe input 1 input pin 3 3 Probe input 2 4 4 Probe input 3 5 5 GND GND connection pin 6 6 Trigger output Trigger mode output pin Z 7 GND GND connection pin 8 8 R
13. 2 2 4 Arrangement on the User System Interface Connector Table 2 1 lists the pin arrangement on the user system interface connector of HS1650EPH60H Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H User I F1 Pin No Signal Name User I F 1 Pin No Signal Name UCN1 1 VREF UCN1 25 P64 2 26 P65 3 27 4 Avss 28 5 Avcc 29 VSS_8 6 VSS_0 30 VSS_9 7 31 8 VSS_1 32 9 33 10 34 11 35 VSS_10 12 36 13 37 14 VSS_5 38 15 RES 39 16 STBY 40 VSS_11 17 NMI 41 VSS_12 18 42 P50 19 VSS_6 43 P51 20 P60 44 P52 21 P61 45 P53 22 P62 46 VSS_13 23 P63 47 P54 24 VSS_7 48 P55 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 13 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H cont User I F1 Pin No Signal Name User I F 1 Pin No Signal Name UCN1 49 P56 UCN1 75 VSS_19 50 P57 76 VSS_20 51 VSS_14 77 52 P10 78 53 P11 79 54 P12 80 55 P13 81 VSS_21 56 VSS_15 82 VSS_22 57 P14 83 PDO 58 P15 84 PD1 59 P16 85 PD2 60 P17 86 PD3 61 VSS_16 87 VSS_23 62 P20 88 VSS_24 63 P21 89 PD4 64 P22 90 PD5 65 P23 91 PD6 66 VSS_17 92 PD7 67 P24 93 VSS_25
14. Figure 3 18 Watch Window The R mark shows that the value of the variable can be updated during user program execution It is possible to recognize the method for updating the value during user program execution according to the color of the R mark Blue outline R The address of the variable is within the range that has been set for the monitoring function and the data is readable by using the monitoring function Blue R An updated value of the data at this location has been read by the monitoring function Black outline R The address of the variable is outside the range that has been set for the monitoring function and the data is not readable by using the monitoring function Black R A value has been updated by reading the normal data Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 32 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging Notes 1 2 3 4 This function can be set per variable or per element or body for structures of data The color of an R in the Name column changes according to the monitoring settings A variable that is allocated to a register cannot be selected for monitoring The procedure to display or modify the contents of memory differs depending on the product If the display of memory contents is updated during execution of the user program realtime emulation may not be available For details refer to section 5 4 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory The H8SX 1527 E6000H H
15. On Chip A On Emulator 7 Figure 4 12 Event Window The popup menu opened by clicking the Event window with the right hand mouse button allows the user to set or change breakpoints define new breakpoints and delete enable or disable breakpoints Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 93 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 9 Referring to Symbols The Label window can be used to display the information on symbols in modules Select Label from the Symbol submenu of the View menu The Label window is displayed so that the user can refer to the addresses of symbols in modules mixi BP 00001000 00001024 _main 00000102E tutorial 00001056 _abort 00001088 __INITSCT oo00010caA loop1 oo00010D4 Loop2 o00010D8 next_loop2 o00010Dpe next_loop1 000010EE loop3 00001104 loop4 00001104 next_loop3 00001110 operator new unsigned long 00001148 __ CALL INIT 0000116 __CALL_END 00001170 operator delete void 00001174 _rand 00001148 _srand gt Figure 4 13 Label Window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 94 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 10 Viewing Memory When the label name is specified the user can view the memory contents that the label has been registered in the Memory window For example to view the memory contents corresponding to __main in byte size e Select Memory from the CPU submenu of the
16. Others Address Control Mode PC TASK Selection Static Ee Time Measurement Unit 20ns Static Static oK Figure 3 38 Time Of Specified Range Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Time Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Address to start measurement End Address Address to end measurement Measures the execution time and the execution count in the range between the start address and end address Starts measurement with a detected program prefetch in the range specified between the start and end addresses and then stops with a detected program prefetch out of the specified range Measurement can be restarted with a detected program prefetch in the specified range The execution count is incremented every time the program is prefetched at the end address of the specified range The execution time measured does not include the time spent while being called from the specified range Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 67 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 2 Start Point To End Point Measurement Performance An Measurement Method PA1 Start Point To End Point Measurement bd Range Name PA1 Point Start Address H o0000000 feall End ddress fH 00000000 Time Out Action Disable ba TASK ID Gthers C TASK C TASK C TAS Selection g Static OK Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Addre
17. Renesas warrants its emulator products to be manufactured in accordance with published specifications and free from defects in material and or workmanship Renesas at its option will repair or replace any emulator products returned intact to the factory transportation charges prepaid which Renesas upon inspection determine to be defective in material and or workmanship The foregoing shall constitute the sole remedy for any breach of Renesas warranty See the Renesas warranty booklet for details on the warranty period This warranty extends only to you the original Purchaser It is not transferable to anyone who subsequently purchases the emulator product from you Renesas is not liable for any claim made by a third party or made by you for a third party DISCLAIMER RENESAS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT IN NO EVENT SHALL RENESAS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECTIVE EMULATOR PRODUCT THE USE OF ANY EMULATOR PRODUCT OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS WARRANTY THIS EMULATOR PRODUCT IS SOLD AS IS AND YOU MUST ASSUME ALL RISK FOR T
18. Section 4 Tutorial 3 Select the line in the Performance Analysis window that has 1 in its No column and click the right hand mouse button to display a popup menu Select Set from this popup menu to display the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box Performance Analysis Propertie 2 x Measurement Method PA1 Time Df Specified Range Measurement X Range Name PA1 Range Start Address H o0000000 jl End Address H o0000000 TASK ID gt Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Others Address Control Made PC Selection Static TASK Selection2 Static Time Measurement Unit 20ns TASK Selection g Static OK Figure 4 58 Performance Analysis Properties Dialog Box 4 Select Time Of Specified Range Measurement from the Measurement Method PA1 combo box 5 The parameter settings are as follows e Enter sort in the Range Name edit box e Click the button on the right of the Start Address edit box to display the Input Function Range dialog box Enter the function name sort in the Function edit box in this dialog box and then click the OK button The addresses for the function Sample sort long will now be set in the Start Address and End Address edit boxes tion Range Function Sample sort long Cancel Figure 4 59 Input Function Range Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 128 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENES
19. 4 3 2 Connecting the Emulator Downloading the Tutorial Program 4 4 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program 4 4 2 Displaying the Source Program Setting a Software Breakpoint Setting Registers Executing the Program Reviewing BrEAkPOIMUtS s ccsiinsci des sssnsdienedsaeseasidsocesvsctsasgisasscoedndscenbedneads cobssessscanssdonobadade sana apscesacsesaddde cobacdasacamsedoeste Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page VII of X RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Pe e et WNrFRO Pd n 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 Referring to Symbols Viewing Memory Watching Variables Displaying Local Variables Stepping Through a Program 4 13 1 Executing the Step In Command 4 13 2 Executing the Step Out Command 4 13 3 Executing the Step Over Command Forced Breaking of Program Executions Resetting the Target MCU Break Function 4 16 1 Software Break Function 4 16 2 On Chip Break Function Trace Functions 4 17 1 Displaying Trace Information by the Free Trace Function 4 17 2 Displaying Trace Information by the Trace Stop Function 4 17 3 Displaying Trace Information by the Conditional Trace Function 4 17 4 Statistics 4 17 5 Function Calls Stack Trace Function Performance Analysis Function 4 19 1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement Profiling Function 102 103 Monitor Function What Next 0 Section5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to Th
20. Me Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP 2 Was the user system connected Yes or no 3 Was the user system interface board connected Yes or no Type number Circle either item in the braces Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 42 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Item Symptom 4 Settings when the malfunction Enter the operational settings of the emulator occurred 1 Operating mode 2 Voltage of the target system Vv 3 Clock selection Emulator clock Xtal oscillator or external clock Circle one item above 4 Operating frequency MHz 5 Failure phenomenon 6 Error in debugging 7 Error detected by the diagnostic program 8 Connection between the High Content of the error message performance Embedded Workshop and the emulator has not been established For errors other than the above fill in the box below Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 43 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 44 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS H8SX 1544 Hardware Part Section 1 Overview 1 1 3 oa p Section 1 Overview Notes on Usage Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Check all components wit
21. Measurement 20ns Sampling OK 9 G A Monitor Function Ot EUN yeaa is es Eee Re eee REELS eeeeetinde tesa ADARRA LENEN OK 02 VECHOWN ssaa tappama prha oo FS GREE SSS SETAE SS SSS Bs Saas SKIP C9 RD 6 Ge Caregen Sar a ee OK 04 TIMEOUT sco eee en see SERS REERE ES ERS ESS SESE EE SEO OO E EES OK 10 G A Parallel RAM Monitor 017 BRAM CLG aR osc tase 39 8 8 lee ace yd 8d debe de de ede eed dad Syd yd eels R E OK DAS PRAM MOMLE OR sere sco s059 5 5 SS SG ao Said Hae A red ddd de Eee OK 11 G A Trace Function O01 Fr e Trace s ccgeciee oes eee es G4 4ES 4S S6 RRA SS ERAN ARATE EES OK 027 TRAGE Stop ois see kkaa tara eeelecteclgcend E E EN OK 03 Tame OED ss aes oe es sR Ste erates Sw Se Sc SSeS doeswneasieilg cg grag des anavete bob as OK 12 Combination 01 B to A Time Measurement FPGA counter 5 OK 02 B to A Time Measurement G A counter 0 OK 03 D to C Time Measurement G A counter OK 13 Parallel Access OD Internal SOM Parallel TBC oss cscs ececececece cscs EnEn Rea a eS OK 02 Internal RAM Parallel Test 6064664446 o0ie sees AAAA OK 03 Internal I O Parallel Test 2 cece eee ee eee OK 14 H8SX 1527 Register Read Write 01 Register Initial Value Check isscsaaccceessataccaseenanne OK 02 Register Write VErLfy 22 sssseeeenessteeeeescssnceeens OK 15 FPGA Parallel RAM Function 01 CHO 256Byte
22. Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 118 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 17 3 Displaying Trace Information by the Conditional Trace Function The conditional trace function only acquires trace information at the address where a specified condition has been satisfied This is useful for analyzing a program focused on reading from or writing to a specific address e g a global variable or memory mapped I O 1 Ifthe user program is running select Halt Program from the Debug menu to halt the program 2 Delete all the break conditions that have been set Uncheck Free Trace on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box otherwise the free trace mode will be selected 3 Select 1 from the list box on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box and then click Edit The Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 dialog box is displayed Select the Acquisition Condition radio button in the After Condition Match group box on the Action page 4 An address must be set as the condition Uncheck Don t Care on the Address page of the Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 dialog box Then use the Watch window to refer to the address on the line that includes a 0 and enter this address in the Start edit box In this example enter H 0OFFB400 This completes the setting of an address Click the OK button to close the Trace Acquisition Condition Cha
23. Test program start message x x shows the version number Shows that the PC interface board is correctly installed in the host computer Shows that the E6000H emulator is correctly connected to the host computer Shows the ID number of the E6000H emulator Shows the time when the diagnostic program was started up Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure x x k NORMAL TEST Press Q to stop COUNT 0001 Main Board Access OL Registers Initial Value Check iccccee eda ae eee dad and OK 02 Registers Write Verify iccnsseeeadididececcecceeeace OK 03 DPRAM Address Decode Test 6 oisicis cic o 3 e058 180808 wears ee ninr ra IGG SKIP 04 OPRAN Marching Tgb cc 66 esa aacled e555 Hee Bee ee a esas SKIP 05 Trace Memory Address Decode Test 005 OK 06 Trace Memory Marching TESE cc ccccecceesacaaeeessarccad OK 07 G A Registers Initial Value Check 00000000000 000 OK 08 G A Registers Write VErity wc nnnnceeeeee eee eee een OK Emulation Board Access I Registers Initial Value Check ssssssssssaias a eeeee RISS OK 02 Registers WETICE VEFTEY cc escccecece ca gieie s acsoa e Seteei we mem emeaea ge siars OK 03 RESERVED 04 RESERVED 05 RESERVED 06 RESERVED 07 RESERVED 08 Firmware RAM Address Decode Test 020e02eeeeee SKIP 09 Firmware RAM Marching TAst ssacacsca eae cee ae ee tassis SKIP 10 MAP Control RAM Address Decode Test
24. a toolchain is in use e Browse to another project workspace The method to create a new workspace depends on whether a toolchain is or is not in use Note that this emulator product does not include a toolchain Use of a toolchain is available in an environment where the H8S H8 300 series C C compiler package or the SuperH RISC engine C C compiler package has been installed For details on this refer to the manual attached to the H8S H8 300 series C C compiler package or the SuperH RISC engine C C compiler package Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 3 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 1 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Not Used 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the High performance Embedded Workshop is activated select Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button Cancel if 2 Opena recent project workspace Administration Browse to another project workspace Figure 2 2 Welcome Dialog Box 2 Creation of anew workspace is started The following dialog box is displayed New Pro gt i 21 xi Projects Workspace Name sample Project Name sample Debugger only Xxxx E6000H Directory C Hen2 sa mple Browse CPU family H88 H8 300 al Tool chain None v Properties Figure 2 3 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Ja
25. e The Point to Point trace mode is not available when channel 1 is used for the performance analysis function 5 7 3 Searching for a Trace Record e When the range for searching is specified in the General page a PTR value to end the search can be specified in the Start PTR option and a PTR value to start the search can be specified in the End PTR e When the user clock i e system clock signal has been selected in Time measurement unit of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box no time stamp information will be searched 5 7 4 Filtering Trace Records e After the trace information is filtered all trace information displayed in the Trace window is saved a range for saving trace information cannot be specified To save a specific range of trace information the filter range must be specified in the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box e When the user clock i e system clock signal has been selected in Time measurement unit of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box no time stamp information will be filtered 5 8 Monitor Function The foreground and background colors cannot be changed in some operating systems Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 148 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 9 Performance Analysis Function 5 9 1 Errors An error will be included in the measured performance as follows e tone resolution er
26. 0000h000mint 00006 OOffbfet OOffbOd0 BD L DATA Isham lll 1 O000h000mi nt 00005 OOftbtes OOffb400 RD L DATA INRAM 1111 1 O000h000ni ne 00004 O0ffbfec 0000106e A L STACK INIAM 1111 1 O000h000mink 00003 00000000 gt S Ibe Ioe 1113 2 0000h00 mint 00002 00002118 RTS L waza 0000106e 5710 Ab w pros RNU 16 1111 0000h000minC 00001 00001070 02030100 Ab ot Pros RMU 1 14411 0000h000mint 4 j Figure 4 42 Trace Window Free Trace Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 115 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 17 2 Displaying Trace Information by the Trace Stop Function While the trace stop function is in use acquisition of trace information stops when a specified condition is satisfied The user can check the program flow by the trace information without breaking the user program execution 1 Delete all the break conditions that have been set Uncheck Free Trace on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box otherwise the free trace mode will be selected 2 Select 1 from the list box on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box and then click Edit The Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 dialog box is displayed Select the Trace Stop radio button in the After Condition Match group box on the Action page ce Acquisition Condition Channel 1 f 2 x Interrupt Count Delay Action Address Data Bus Area Prob
27. On Chip sheet The Breakpoint Properties dialog box the On Chip Break page will appear 2x Software Break On Chip Break On Emulator Break Sequential Break Tio 20 0 4 Count time count between trigger outputs I From4to3 Back 1 address H 00001000 prefetch break before Edit Reset Reset AIl Figure 3 22 Breakpoint Properties Dialog Box On Chip Break Page Sequential Break Use this item to specify a sequential break consisted of on chip breakpoints A sequential break allows breaking the program when the conditions of several channels are satisfied sequentially Two to four points can be selected for this function The conditions are satisfied from 1 to 4 in order Check a box to use the sequential break function select 3 to use two points 2 to use three points and 1 to use four points Run time count between trigger outputs Measures the time between two points by using channels 3 and 4 After channel 4 has been satisfied the time is measured when channel 3 is satisfied The result is displayed in RunTime Count on the Platform sheet of the Status window Back Puts the setting back to the previous state at the time the dialog box has been displayed Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 37 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging List box Edit Reset Reset All Displays the current settings for each of the ch
28. On chip break column On chip breaks e Second column S W Breakpoints ASM column PC and breakpoint information This window is used in the same way as the source code window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 22 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code You can modify the assembly language code by double clicking on the instruction that you want to change The Assembler dialog box will be opened Address Code 0001040 0D01 Mnemonic Cancel Figure 3 9 Assembler Dialog Box The address instruction code and mnemonic are displayed Enter a new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonics field Pressing the Enter key will replace the memory content with the new instruction and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will replace the memory content with the new instruction and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing the Esc key will close the dialog box without modifying the memory contents Note The assembly language code being displayed is the current memory content If the memory contents are changed the Assembler dialog box and the Disassembly window will show the new assembly language code but the source file displayed in the Editor window will be unchanged This is the same even if the source file contains assembly codes 3 2 5 Viewing a Specific Address When you are viewing you
29. Performance Analysis Properties window has a support function to enter the address range of a function automatically if the name of the function is entered to set an address range Entering a function name in the Input Function Range dialog box displayed by clicking the button on the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box automatically enters the address range of the function Eunction Sample Cancel Figure 3 37 Input Function Range Window Notes 1 Entering the name of an overload function or a class opens the Select Function dialog box Select a function in this dialog box 2 The addresses figured out are just for reference In some cases the end address of a function may be different Check the last instruction of the function in the Disassembly window to correct the value set in End Address so that it will be the address of the last instruction in general the last instruction of a function is a RTS instruction A label name or an expression can be entered instead of an address value in boxes where an address should be entered Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 66 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement Performance An S Measurement Method PA1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement bd Range Name PA1 Range Start Address H o0000000 foll End Address H 00000000 TASK ID gt Common Settings of Performance PA1 8
30. Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 79 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging RTOS Support Function Sets up the RTOS extension function Don t Care Disables the RTOS extension function TASK ID writing area Specifies the address where the task ID is written to in the RTOS TASK ID writing area input edit box Specifies the address where the task IDs are written Set an address within the on chip I O area that does not contain I O registers Setting When using the kernel library for E6000H RTOS debugging support on the Renesas HI1000 4 searches for the address to which the area for E6000H debugging has been allocated TASK Selection Selects task IDs for use in setting conditions for the on emulator break tracing performance analysis and the display of trace information Don t Care Disables TASK Selection TASK Selection N N 1 to 3 Enables the TASK Selection N condition for use as an on emulator breakpoint Setting a TASK Selection N condition as an on emulator breakpoint etc specifies the task ID or OS as specified in TASK Selection N as a condition Drop down list for selecting a task ID or OS Select the task ID or OS A task ID of 0 selects the OS Edit box for entering a task ID Set a task ID within the range from D 1 to D 255 TASK STEP Specifies step operation in task units Enable Selection enables step operation in task units 3 12 2 Task Step Funct
31. Table 3 5 Initial Values of Registers in the H8SX 1600 series MCU and the Emulator Emulator H8SX 1600 series MCU Register Name Power On Reset Reset CPU Power On Reset PC PC value indicated by PC value indicated by Undefined the power on reset the power on reset vector vector ERO to ER7 H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined CCR B 1XXXXXXX B 1XXXXXXX B 1XXXXXXX EXR B o1111111 Value before the reset B o1111111 MACH H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined MACL H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined VBR H 00000000 Value before the reset H 00000000 SBR H FFFFFFOO Value before the reset H FFFFFFOO Note X indicates an undefined bit 3 4 9 Emulation Memory The total size of emulation memory installed in this emulator is 4 Mbytes This can be used as four 1 Mbyte blocks at maximum To allocate memory the start address must be aligned to a 1 Mbyte boundary The emulation memory and user memory cannot coexist on a single address Emulation memory must be allocated to a 3 state access space The number of access state cycles for the emulation memory is three plus wait state cycles Set up the bus state controller so that no wait state cycle will be inserted for access to such areas Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 56 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 5 Notes Specific to the H8SX 1650 E6000H Emulator 3 5 1 Custom Device Function The maximum value
32. 0 Port1 Port2 lt gt Port3 P33 P30 lt gt Port3 P35 P30 lt gt Port3 P37 P30 lt gt Port4 P43 P40 lt gt Port4 P47 P40 Port5 lt gt Port6 P65 P60 lt gt Port6 P67 P60 Port Port8 PortS P91 P90 fh ra mean MNI mon Enable Disable Figure 3 2 Configuration Properties Dialog Box Custom Device Page Use this page to customize the target MCU This procedure is necessary when the target MCU currently in use is not included in the list of Device The items are adopted by the device last selected Custom Device page ROM Select the on chip ROM area size RAM Select the on chip RAM area size ExRAM Select the size of the expansion RAM area Port The ports for use must be selected here Select the ports that you want to change the settings and press the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the ports or lt gt is displayed with the enabled ports and or lt gt with the disabled ports Modules The on chip modules for use must be selected here Select the on chip modules that you want to change the settings and press the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the on chip modules or lt gt is displayed with the enabled modules and or lt gt with the disabled modules Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 15 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debug
33. 00000102E 00002000 000020 6 00002046 00001174 H 00000024 H 00000000 H 00000000E H 0000001E H 00000004 H 00000088 H 00000046 H 00000054 H 00000080 H 0000002E H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 BPPRPRPRP PRP eB H o 442 88074 135 268 63 3151 603 4695 15632 4120 Figure 4 66 Profile Window Tree Sheet RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 133 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 7 Click the right hand mouse button on the Profile window and select View Profile Chart to open the Profile Chart window tutorial Figure 4 67 Profile Chart Window 8 To disable the profiling function uncheck Enable Profiler in the popup menu opened by clicking the right hand mouse button on the Profile window Delete all the break conditions that have been set Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 134 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 21 Monitor Function The emulator allows monitoring of the contents of specified addresses in memory during execution of the user program In this example we monitor the content of the address range where variable a of the tutorial function is stored 1 Select the CPU submenu from the View menu Selecting Monitor Setting from the Monitor submenu displays the Monitor Setting dialog box Monitor
34. 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications tap gt A23 to AO tesp1 gt lt CS7 to CSO y ASI AHi taso When read RDNn 4 D15 to DO mn B i RD WR When read RDNn 0 When written LHWR and LLWR D15 to DO When written Figure 3 2 Basic Bus Cycle Software Wait The delay time is generated on the timing of the RES and _NMI signals when they are input to the evaluation chip from the user system as shown in table 3 3 because this connection for those signals is via logic circuit on the evaluation chip board Table 3 3 Delay Time for Signal Connected via the Evaluation Chip Board Signal Name Delay Time ns _RES 18 _NMI 18 _STBY 16 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 32 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU MD control circuit VHC244 User system Vec Monitor circuit LPT16244 Vec EPM7256 VHC14 47KO RES _STBY MMI Figure 3 3 User System Interface Circuits 1 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 33 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU User system Voltage follower circuit Vcc Vss NC EMLE Vcc LPT244 VHC244 EPM7256 47 KQ EXTAL NC lt XTAL Figure 3 4 User System Interface Circuits 2 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 34 of 68 REJ10J1
35. 5 MHz Crystal Oscillator A crystal oscillator is not supplied with the emulator Prepare and use one that has the same frequency as that of the user system When using a crystal oscillator as the MCU clock source the frequency range must be from 4 to 9 MHz CAUTION Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting the CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR Otherwise the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Follow the procedure listed below to install the crystal oscillator 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Check that the power LED is not lit 2 Attach the crystal oscillator into the terminals on the emulator s front end unit figure 2 3 Be careful to ensure that the terminals do not touch the casing 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power The crystal oscillator will then be automatically set and started up This function will allow the execution of the user program at the operating frequency of the user system even when the user system is not connected to the emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 13 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Enlarged Crystal oscillator Crystal oscillator terminals HS1544EPH60H PCN2 RENESAS Figure 2 3 Installing the Crystal Oscillator External Clock Follow the procedure listed below to select the external clock 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Check
36. Area Check Byte 2cccis cece ee eee eee eens OK 02 CHO 256Byte Area Check Word 2 eee eee eee OK 03 CHO 256Byte Area Check Long Word 0 OK 04 CH1 CH11 256Byte Area Check Long Word OK Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 40 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Normal stopped at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Tests run for xh xmin xs Summary Tests performed 1 time s is 2 3 4 5 6 7 G A 8 G A 9 G A 10 G A 11 G A Main Board Access Emulation Board Access Evaluation Board Access Basic Function GO to BREAK Time Measurement Emulation Monitor Break Function Performance Analysis Function Monitor Function Parallel RAM Monitor Trace Function 12 Combination 13 Parallel Access 14 H8SX 1527R Register Read Write 15 FPGA Parallel RAM Function 4 6 Repair Request Sheet Thank you for purchasing the H8SX E6000H emulator Goooooeoeoeeeeo eo oo oe 6 Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Shows the time when diagnostic program execution ended Shows the execution time of the diagnostic program Shows the total number of errors for each test item In the event of a malfunction fill in the repair request sheet on the following pages and send it to your distri
37. Cheik ncaa sa eee eae Ba eee eS eRe OK 02 Registers Write VeEriiy iccessaae ew ceees eed ceeeeweeeenseceaeess OK 03 H UDI IDCODE Check 66 5 canadaciee ee digas eee eee ease eae OK 04 Bairmware BOOT aeaeaei dii e 5809 8 19 09 1818S E S0g090 5S N OK 05 Configuration Set sc cc es eee aes wRG Gea Be oe ae Gre Sl eae eee RTS OK 4 Basic Function 01 GO Ce BREAK c 64 0 5 02 246 2 S95 h0 5 RSS SRE MSTA RCT R RT TR EERE REAR E RRS OK 02 EESET GO a aa a a a aa aE OK OII OE ark PAARA NAAA A AN AN ane SENO LAS OK 04 KEX REDE srriiinnnan EEE EEEE EANA OK 0S7 BRRCONT 2 2 ccc eros cs sdieses HEE SERS ESSE EO e a OK 06 Internal ROM Address Decode Test 0 eee eee eee OK Ov Ant ernal ROM Marching lt lt 25 4 6 aie adieee od ERARA ed ESAS S SAS OM OK 08 Internal RAM Address Decode Test 00 eee eee eee eee eee OK 09 Internal KAM Marching 2 22 ss0055 saa ea Rae oe ee Aes Bae Se SRS OK 10 Emulation RAM Address Decode Test ccc ccc ccc cece eect ccc ecees SKIP 11 Emulation RAM Marching TADE sacmesencdae ewe w ee owieeeeneeaee ace SKIP 127 MAR REGSE s don i gars amaaan Fy dys prpeody SBS BORIS UE NR UE RENE LOLS UaNS A ARE OK 5 GO to BREAK Time Measurement 01 Counter Test Mode EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling 20ns OK 02 EMU 12MH2 MPU T2MHe Sampling 20NS sce e eee ee Sede eae ae ee eee eee OK 03 EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling 1 6us 2 eee eee ee
38. D3 po D3 D2 D1 DO Do D2 D0 Do D2 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 147 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 7 Trace Functions 5 7 1 Displaying the Trace Information e The states of IRQ15 to IRQO are ORed and this result is applied as the IRQ condition e The executed instructions and timestamp cannot be displayed together 5 7 2 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions e The trace will stop several cycles after a condition is satisfied e The state of IRQ15 to IRQO are ORed and this result is applied as the IRQ condition e Six or more bus cycles are required between pass points of sequential trace stop conditions and reset condition e Six or more bus cycles are required between the start and end of measurement when 1 2 3 4 or 5 6 is specified in Run time count between trigger outputs of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box e Fifteen or more bus cycles are required between the start and end of measurement when 7 8 is specified in Run time count between trigger outputs of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box e Six or more bus cycles are required between trace stop mode conditions e A sequential break or a trace stop may be incorrect when the user program is executed after the specified address condition has been applied as the PC address to start execution
39. Enable Extracts function calls Disable Does not extract function calls When Enable is selected only the cycles that include function calls are extracted for display from the acquired trace information The content of the trace buffer is not changed by extraction of function calls Using this function for the result of the free trace or the trace information that includes function calls allows the user to know the order of function calls Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 62 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 9 Analyzing Performance Use the performance analysis function to measure the rate of execution time The performance analysis function does not affect the realtime operation because it measures the rate of execution time in the specified range by using the circuit for measurement of hardware performance included in the emulator Select one of the following five modes according to the purpose of measurement Table 3 1 Mode Available Measurement Modes Description Purpose Time Of Specified Range Measurement Measures the execution time and execution count in the specified range Measurement of time taken for processing of functions except for that required for child functions called from the functions Start Point To End Point Measurement Measures the execution time and execution count between the specified addresses Measurement of time taken for processing of functi
40. F11 Executes the user program to reach the end of the current function Step Launches the Step Program dialog box allowing the user to modify the settings for stepping Step Auto Mode Steps only one source line when the Editor window is active When the Disassembly window is active stepping is executed in a unit of assembly instructions Assembly Executes stepping in a unit of assembly instructions Source Steps only one source line Halt Program Esc Stops the execution of the user program Initialize Disconnects the emulator and connects it again Connect Connects the emulator Disconnect Disconnects the emulator Save Memory Saves the specified memory area data to a file Verify Memory Verifies file contents against memory contents Configure Overlay Selects the target section group when the overlay function is used Download Modules Downloads the object program Unload Modules Unloads the object program RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 159 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 Appendix A Menus Table A 1 GUI Menus cont Toolbar Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks Setup Customize Customize the High performance Embedded Workshop application Options Sets option of the High performance Embedded Workshop application Format Views Configure fonts colors keywords and so o
41. FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page VI of VIII REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS CAUTION Place the emulator station and evaluation chip board so that the trace cables are not bent or twisted A bent or twisted cable will impose stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the emulator station is placed in a secure position so that it does not move during use nor impose stress on the user interface Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page VII of VIII RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page VIII of VIII REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Preface Thank you for purchasing the E6000H emulator CAUT
42. H O00a R2 lint OxO00ffbOd8 ER3 class Sample Figure 4 21 Locals Window The user can click mark at the left side of class instance p_sam in the Locals window to watch all the elements View the elements of class instance p_sam before and after the execution of the sort function and check that the random data is sorted in the descending order Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 99 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 13 Stepping Through a Program The High performance Embedded Workshop provides a range of step menu commands that allow efficient program debugging Table 4 2 Step Options Menu Command Description Step In Executes each statement including statements within functions Step Over Executes a function call in a single step Step Out Steps out of a function and stops at the statement following the statement in the program that called the function Step Steps the specified times repeatedly at a specified rate 4 13 1 Executing the Step In Command The Step In command steps into the called function and stops at the first statement of the called function e To step through the sort function select Step In from the Debug menu or click the Step In button on the toolbar Figure 4 22 Step In Button Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 100 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial aly 12 13 14 15 1
43. HS1544EPH60H H8SX 1638 E6000H Emulator CPU1600 Selec or H8S sys of the H8SX 1638 H8SX his debugging platform when the H8SX 1638 H8SX 1632 X 1634 E6000H emulator is in use Note that the user em interface board HS1638ECN61H is required for emulation 1632 or H8SX 1634 HS1650EPH60H HS1638ECN61H H8SX 1648 E6000H Emulator CPU1600 Selec or H8S sys his debugging platform when the H8SX 1648 H8SX 1642 X 1644 E6000H emulator is in use Note that the user em interface board HS1648ECN61H is required for emulation of the H8SX 1648 H8SX 1642 or H8SX 1644 HS1650EPH60H HS1648ECH61H H8SX 1658 E6000H Emulator CPU1600 Sel ect his debugging plai tform when the H8SX 1658R H8SX 1653R or H8SX 1654R E6000H emulator is in use User sys emulati em interface board HS1658RECN61H is necessary for on of the H8SX 1658R H8SX 1653R or H8SX 1654R HS1650EPH60H HS1658RECN61H H8SX 1668 E6000H Emulator CPU1600 Sel ect his debugging plai tform when the H8SX 1668R H8SX 1663R or H8SX 1664R E6000H emulator is in use Note thai the user system interface board HS1668RECH61H is required for emulation of the H8SX 1668R H8SX 1663R or H8SX 1664R HS1650EPH60H HS1668RECH61H 5 3 Memory Map e Some emulators may not support the memory mapping function e Attributes of a memory map can be defined in units of blocks as s
44. New Condition Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 121 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 6 Then select Area from the Item combo box and enter INRAM in the Start edit box Then click the Add button the new condition is now added to the R W WR display in the Condition column of the Result list box so that it now shows R W WR amp Area INRAM This completes the setting of the conditions St ic m Statistic Analysis Default Range ltem Area Start INFAM End Result RZW WRA amp Area INRAM Figure 4 50 Statistic Dialog Box Condition Added Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 122 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 7 To start statistical analysis of the specified condition press the Result button The number of write operations that satisfies the conditions and the PTR values will be displayed Default Range ltem bea O Start INFAM End Result RAW WR amp Area INRAM 1361 08488 03485 084 Figure 4 51 Statistic Dialog Box Result of Analysis 8 Click the Close button to close the Statistic dialog box 9 Delete the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to delete all the event points that have been set
45. On chip break channel 4 These are also set by using the popup menu S W Breakpoints column This column displays the following items E A bookmark is set A PC breakpoint is set gt PC location Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 20 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging gt To switch off a column in all source files Click the right hand mouse button on the Editor window or select the Edit menu Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog box is displayed A check box indicates whether the column is enabled or not If it is checked the column is enabled If the check box is gray the column is enabled in some files and disabled in others Deselect the check box of a column you want to switch off 5 Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect oboe Global Editor Column States 2 x Line Number On Chip Break VS W Breakpoints Cancel S W Breakpoints ASM Source Address Figure 3 7 Global Editor Column States Dialog Box gt To switch off a column in one source file 1 Open the source file which contains the column you want to remove and click the Edit menu 2 Click the Columns menu item to display a cascaded menu item The columns are displayed in this popup menu If a column is enabled it has a tick mark next to its name Clicking the entry will toggle whether t
46. PO16 PO23 PO24 PO31 Figure 3 21 User System Interface Circuits with HS1658RECN61H Connected 1 User system P20 P21 Sub MCU TIOCA3 TIOCB3 Figure 3 22 User System Interface Circuits with HS1658RECN61H Connected 2 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 50 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications User system MCU SN74CB3Q3306A ae P16 P15 SN74CB3Q3306A P14 Sub MCU Figure 3 23 User System Interface Circuits with HS1658RECN61H Connected 3 Monitor User system circuit LPT16244 MD_CLK MD_CLK PMO PM4 PMO PM4 VBUS VBUS 1kQ DrVcc DrVcc USD USD USD USD DrVss Figure 3 24 User System Interface Circuits with HS1658RECN61H Connected 4 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 51 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU VHC244 EPM7128 UHC14 _REs EPM7128 Figure 3 25 User System Interface Circuits with HS1658RECN61H Connected 5 User system _RES User system P13 EPM3256ATC Sub MCU ADTRGO Figure 3 26 User System Interface Circuits with HS1658RECN61H Connected 6 Note The power supply circuits shown in figures 3 7 and 3 8 are turned on off by the setting of the SW1 jumper pin on the user system interface board HS1653ECN61H or HS1664ECH61H Ensure that the jumper pin is inserted to ON when connecting the emulator with t
47. Preparation Flowchart Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 9 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 4 ne 2 2 Emulator Connection following description covers connection of the emulator 1 Connecting the Emulator to the User System A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 2 2 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the right side of the E6000H station s front panel is not lit Remove the AC power cable of the E6000H station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet The emulator is connected to the user system via the user system interface cable 2 Connecting the User System Interface Cable A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system and check pin numbers on the connectors and IC socket before connecting or disconnecting the USER SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE Connection with the power on or incorrect connection will damage the emulator user system interface cable and user system and result in a FIRE HAZARD For details on the method of connecting the user system interface cable refer to the descriptions of the user sys tem interface cables for individual H8SX 15
48. Program Executions The High performance Embedded Workshop can force a break during the execution of a program e Cancel all the breakpoints e To execute the remaining sections of the tutorial function select Go from the Debug menu or the Go button on the toolbar Figure 4 28 Go Button e The program goes into an endless loop To force a break during execution select Halt from the Debug menu or the Halt button on the toolbar Figure 4 29 Halt Button 4 15 Resetting the Target MCU Resetting the target MCU initializes the on chip I O registers and makes the program counter jump to the address set in the reset vector e To reset the target MCU select Reset CPU from the Debug menu or the Reset CPU button on the toolbar Figure 4 30 Reset CPU Button e To execute the user program immediately after a reset select Reset Go from the Debug menu or the Reset Go button on the toolbar Figure 4 31 Reset Go Button Note This tutorial program is executable from the reset vector Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 104 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 16 Break Function The emulator provides break functions by software breaks on chip breaks and on emulator breaks Software breakpoints on chip breakpoints and on emulator breakpoints can be set in the High performance Embedded Workshop s Event window An overview and setting of the
49. RSE SS ESE See eS OK 04 KEYBREAK Siasii bo peau wens a eae ee oe sata eerie ls AAA OK 05 BRKCONT cncn eee nae Rew Wee nme hed ce Sdbe eee eee ees aaebae ewe OK 06 Internal ROM Address Decode Test 22000 OK 07 Internal ROM Marching Test 2 eee eee ee eee OK 08 Internal RAM Address Decode Test 020ee ee eeee OK 09 Internal RAM Marching Test 22 2 ee eee eee OK 10 RESERVED 11 RESERVED Tar MAP POTE vasara rir ea eta weal ee web bv ar aos Ginny SRS STS a INRI ARA OK 5 GO to BREAK Time Measurement 01 Counter Test Mode EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling 20ns OK 02 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling 2005 OK 03 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling 1 6us OK 04 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling 52us OK 05 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU OK 06 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 2 222 005 OK 07 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 4 2 2 2004 OK 08 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 8 2 22 005 OK 09 EMU 12Mhz MPU 48Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 10 EMU 4Mhz MPU 32Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 11 EMU 35 7Mhz MPU 35 7Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 12 EMU 35 9Mhz MPU 35 9Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 13 EMU f 1Mhz MPU f 2Mhz Sampling 20ns SKIP Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 33 of 44 RENESAS
50. Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 4 Control Input Signals RES NMI and STBY The MCU control input signals are RES NMI and STBY The RES NMI and STBY signals are only valid when emulation was started with normal program execution i e they are invalid when emulation was started with step execution The input of the RES NMI or STBY signal during execution or step execution can be disabled by a setting in the Configuration dialog box 3 4 5 Watchdog Timer WDT When emulation is suspended i e by a break counting up by the WDT timer counter TCNT is also suspended Counting resumes when emulation is resumed user mode During break mode a prescaler which supplies a clock to TCNT operates continuously Since the prescaler might be in different phases before and after emulation goes through a period in the break mode a break can change the period before the WDT overflows by 1 cycle of the prescaler s clock 3 4 6 A D Converter As well as analog input pins the A D converter has AVcc AVss Avref and ADTRG pins As the A D converter operates with an independent power supply connect AVcc the power supply pin to the A D power supply on the user system Notes 1 When the A D converter is not in use connect AVcc to Vcc 2 As there are user system interface cable compression circuits for compression at the ratio of 5 3 3 wiring on the printed circuit board and protective circuits are connect
51. Setting Monitor Setting Name monitori Address Size byte poo O Access Format eyte asem O Z Auto Refresh at rate ms D0050 IV Beading the Initial Value r Options z r Color Change Indicator Change x Foreground oe Background Cc V Mayfly m Detail DETAIL NOT SUPPORTED Detail m History Figure 4 68 Monitor Setting Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 135 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 2 Set the items in the Monitor Setting dialog box as follows Enter moni tor1 in the Name edit box e Set the parameters in the Options group box as follows a Use the Watch window to refer to the address on the line where variable a which is defined within the tutorial function is allocated and enter this address in the Address edit box In this example H 0OFFB400 is entered b Enter H 20 in the Size byte combo box c Select BYTE ASCII from the Access Format combo box d Check the Auto Refresh at rate ms check box and enter D 00500 in the edit box e Check the Reading the Initial Value check box e Set the parameters in the Color group box as follows a Select Change from the Change Indicator combo box b Select red and white in the Foreground and Background combo boxes respectively c Check the Mayfly check box Note Depending on the op
52. Trace Window To open the Trace window choose View gt Code gt Trace or click the Trace toolbar button amp 3 8 2 Acquiring Trace Information When the emulator does not set the acquisition condition of the trace information all bus cycles are acquired by default without any condition free trace mode In the free trace mode trace acquisition is started with the execution of the user program and stopped by halting the user program The acquired trace information is displayed in the Trace window ee E eee SA Sei Hw PTR InstructionAddress Code TASK Probes IRO Timestamp 00012 0000210e cwr su 1 CODA 16 R2 1111 2 O000h0 nint 00011 un O000h000ma ne 00010 00002112 sr H 200 8 1111 1 0000h000nint 00009 00002114 ADDL 0028 16 ER7 1311 8 0000h000minC 00008 1113 1 0000h000mint 00007 1111 3 0000h000mint 00006 1111 2 0000h000mint 00005 O0ttbtes 1111 1 0000h000mint 00004 O0ffbtec 1111 1 O000h000mink 00003 00000000 iiti 2 0000h00 nint 00002 00002118 RTS L wez nea 0000106e 1111 0000k000minC 00003 00001070 EMU 1E 1111 0000h000mint Figure 3 26 Trace Window This window displays the following trace information items PTR Cycle number in the trace buffer When the most recent record is record 0 earlier record numbers go backwards 1 2 If a delay count has been set the cycle number where the trace stop condition has been satisfied is record 0 For the cyc
53. VSS_49 161 PH4 185 162 PH5 186 163 PH6 187 164 PH7 188 165 VSS_42 189 VSS_50 166 VSS_43 190 VSS_51 167 PIO 191 168 PI1 192 169 Pl2 193 170 PI3 194 171 VSS_44 195 VSS_52 172 VSS_45 196 VSS_53 173 Pl4 197 174 PI5 198 175 PI6 199 176 PI7 200 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 16 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H cont User I F 2 Pin No Signal Name User I F2 Pin No Signal Name UCN2 1 UCN2 31 2 32 3 33 4 34 VSS_59 5 35 6 36 4 VSS_54 37 8 P30 38 9 P31 39 VSS_60 10 P32 40 11 P33 41 12 VSS_55 42 13 P34 43 14 P35 44 VSS_61 15 P36 45 16 P37 46 17 VSS_56 47 18 48 19 49 VSS_62 20 50 21 51 22 52 23 53 24 VSS_57 54 VSS_63 25 55 26 56 27 57 28 58 29 VSS_58 59 VSS_64 30 60 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 17 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H cont
54. Viewing the Current Status Reading and Displaying the Emulator Information Regularly 3 4 1 Opening the Extended Monitor Window 3 4 2 Selecting Items to be Displayed Displaying Memory Contents in Realtime 3 5 1 Opening the Monitor Window 3 5 2 Changing the Monitor Settings 3 5 3 Temporarily Stopping Update of the Monitor 3 5 4 Deleting the Monitor Settings 3 5 5 Monitoring Variables 3 5 6 Hiding the Monitor Window 3 5 7 Managing the Monitor Window Looking at Variables 3 6 1 Watch Window Using the Event Points 3 7 1 Setting a Software Breakpoint 3 7 2 Setting an On Chip Breakpoint 3 7 3 Settings an On Emulator Breakpoint 3 7 4 Editing Event Points 3 7 5 Modifying Event Points 3 7 6 Enabling an Event Point 3 71 Disabling an Event Point seis cscisesccsscccsscseacevscssievesaavaustesssntedcasveesasavs EEA AS EE A ANSETE Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page VI of X REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS 3 8 3 9 3 11 3 12 3 7 8 Deleting an Event Point scarsa a ETEA AEEA ESENES ASIAA EESAN EE EEE 3 7 9 Deleting All Event Points 3 7 10 Viewing the Source Line for an Event Point 3 7 11 Setting a Data Condition for a Variable in the Source Program Viewing the Trace Information 3 8 1 Opening the Trace Window 3 8 2 Acquiring Trace Information 3 8 3 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions 3 8 4 Searching for a Trace Record 3 8 5 Clearing the Trace Information 3 8 6 Saving the Tra
55. act as an I O port pin the emulator will not set the SSCK pin up as an I O port pin To allow use of the SSCK pin as an I O port pin have the program write 0 to the MSS bit if a conflict error occurs This procedure is not necessary unless the SSCK pin is to be used as an T O port pin 2 Operation of Port Pins that can also Function as SSU Pins Ports 2 A and D a When the SSU pins are set up as inputs In the actual MCU the state of an SSU pin operating as an input can be read from the corresponding port register Note however that the value read is undefined in the case of the emulator b When the SSU pins are set up as outputs In the actual MCU the state of an SSU pin operating as an output can be read from the corresponding port register as long as the value of the corresponding data direction register bit is 0 Note however that the value read is undefined in the case of the emulator 3 Input Buffer Control Register PnICR In the emulator pins can be used as inputs for the peripheral modules listed below regardless of the setting of the corresponding ICR bits In the actual MCU however the input buffers are invalid and the input signals are fixed high for pins where the corresponding ICR bit has been cleared to 0 A pin cannot be used as an input for a peripheral module unless the corresponding ICR bit is set to 1 If you are using any of these modules ensure that your program sets the ICR bits for the corresponding pins to 1 bef
56. any RAM access After that the RAM should not be accessed for at least one cycle This address will be reinitialized whenever the reset pin is activated goes low In such cases write the value H 35 to the same address again after the system has been released from the reset state In the actual MCU H8SX 1527 or H8SX 1527R writing to the RAM takes a fixed two cycles and H 35 is always read from address H FFFFFD97 Writing to the address is invalid Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 27 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 5 Notes Specific to the H8SX 1527 E6000H and H8SX 1527R E6000H Emulators 3 5 1 Custom Device Function The maximum value selectable for the on chip ROM with the custom device functions of the H8SX 1527 E6000H and H8SX 1527R E6000H emulators is 2 Mbytes Do not specify a value greater than 2 Mbytes 3 5 2 Non availability of P2 Open Drain Outputs In the emulator port P2 pins cannot be set up as NMOS open drain outputs by settings in register PAODR Do not set any bit in P2ODR to 1 3 5 3 Limitations on Control of the SSU Pins 1 Switching between Operation as an SSCK Pin and an I O Port Pin after Conflict Errors If a conflict error occurs while the values of bits MSS and SCKS in an SSCRH register are 1 the MSS bit will be cleared and the corresponding SSCK pin will be switched to act as an input After that even if the user sets the SCKS bit to 0 to reconfigure the SSCK pin to
57. at the address of the event point The Go to Source menu is only available when one event point that has the corresponding source file is selected 3 7 11 Setting a Data Condition for a Variable in the Source Program Open the Editor window that shows the variable for which you want to set a data condition Place the mouse cursor on the variable name and select E6000H On Chip Break from the popup menu The on chip break conditions currently set are displayed on the channels Select a channel on which you want to set a data condition After selecting the channel the On Chip Break page of the Breakpoint Properties dialog box opens while the data condition for the variable is set Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 44 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 8 Viewing the Trace Information The emulator acquires the results of each instruction execution into the trace buffer as trace information and displays it in the Trace window The conditions for the trace information acquisition can be specified in the Trace Acquisition dialog box Since trace information in bus cycles is acquired by the hardware circuit and stored in the trace buffer the realtime operation is retained The Trace window displays the content of the trace buffer which records up to 128 k bus cycles from the last program run and is always updated Note For notes on the trace functions refer to section 5 7 Trace Functions 3 8 1 Opening the
58. auto update interval Note Select Refresh from the popup menu when data is not displayed correctly after changing the address or content of memory 3 5 2 Changing the Monitor Settings Selecting Monitor Setting from the popup menu of the Monitor window displays the Monitor Setting dialog box which allows the settings to be changed Colors the size of accesses and the display format can be easily changed from Color or Access of the popup menu 3 5 3 Temporarily Stopping Update of the Monitor During user program execution the display of the Monitor window is automatically updated according to the auto update interval Select Lock Refresh from the popup menu of the Monitor window to stop the update of display The characters in the address section are displayed in black and the update of display is stopped Selecting Lock Refresh again from the popup menu cancels the stopped state 3 5 4 Deleting the Monitor Settings Selecting Close from the popup menu of the Monitor window to be deleted closes the Monitor window and deletes the monitor settings 3 5 5 Monitoring Variables Using the Watch window refers to the value of any variables When the address of the variable registered in the Watch window exists within the monitoring range that has been set by the Monitor function the value of the variable can be updated and displayed This function allows checking the content of a variable without affect
59. break function are described below 4 16 1 Software Break Function The emulator can set up to 255 software breakpoints e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu or click the Eventpoints toolbar button 2 The Event window is displayed e Select the Software sheet ioj x A X Type TP software On Chip A On Emulator 7 Figure 4 32 Event Window Before Setting a Software Breakpoint e Click the Event window with the right hand mouse button and select Add from the popup menu e The Breakpoint Properties dialog box Software Break page is displayed Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 105 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial sential Bre Parra Court Figure 4 33 Breakpoint Properties Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 106 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial e Click the Edit button to display the Software Break dialog box H 00001 06E Figure 4 34 Software Break Dialog Box e Use the Editor window to refer to the address on the line that has p_sam gt s0 a 0 within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address edit box In this example enter H 0000106E Note This dialog box differs depending on the product For the items of each product refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help e Click the OK button Then click
60. by Start and End For details Data Sets data conditions Don t Care Value Use mask Except this value Access Size Position Long Word Byte refer to section 5 12 Input Format Selects no data bus condition Sets a data bus value Sets mask conditions Set the mask bits if Use mask is selected Masked bits satisfy this break condition regardless of their values Sets a value other than that has been specified as the data bus condition Selects the data access size Sets a data bus value as a number The position of the valid data bus is specified None 4n Upper word 4n 2 Lower word 4n Upper byte of the upper word 4n 1 Lower byte of the upper word 4n 2 Upper byte of the lower word 4n 3 Lower byte of the lower word Bus Area Sets access type bus status and read write cycle conditions Access type Bus State Area Sets access type conditions When Don t Care has been selected no access type condition can be set Sets bus status conditions When Don t Care has been selected no bus status condition can be set Sets area conditions When Don t Care has been selected no area condition can be set On chip ROM Selects the on chip ROM area as the condition On chip RAM Selects the on chip RAM area as the condition On chip I O Selects the on chip I O area as the condition Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 42
61. displays error messages if an error occurs during emulation in the dedicated message dialog box when the High performance Embedded Workshop is used and on the status bar Table 6 2 lists error messages during emulation Table 6 2 Error Messages during Emulation Error Message Description and Solution Communication DLL error Communication Timeout error The power of the emulator is turned off or there is a communication error Exit the High performance Embedded Workshop re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail Parallel Access Error An error has occurred during a parallel access Parallel accesses are disabled until a break occurs Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 155 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 6 Error Messages Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 156 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Appendix A Menus Appendix A Menus Table A 1 shows GUI menus Table A 1 GUI Menus Toolbar Menu Option Shortcut Button Remarks View Command Line Ctrl L Opens the Command Line window Workspace Alt K ial Opens the Workspace window Output Alt U A Opens the Output window Disassembly Ctrl D Opens the Disassembly window CPU Registers Ctrl R Opens
62. emulator a Connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation Select Debug gt Debug Settings to open the Debug Settings dialog box It is possible to register the download module or the command chain that is automatically executed at activation When the dialog box is closed after setting the Debug Settings dialog box the emulator will automatically be connected b Connecting the emulator without the setting at emulator activation Connect the emulator by simply switching the session file to one in which the setting for the emulator use has been registered File Edit View Project Options Build Tools Window Help Seka 4 eelOTrallomlee aja 25ean Jfer d wee Ajee esana E EE sample B C source file 2 sample c 2 sbrk c Version Control Figure 2 12 Selecting the Session File In the list box that is circled in figure 2 12 select the session file name including the character string that has been set in the Target name text box in figure 2 9 New Project Step 8 dialog box The setting for using the emulator has been registered in this session file Selecting Debug gt Connect connects the emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 11 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 3 Re connecting the Emulator When the emulator is disconnected re connection is possible by using the following methods Select Debug gt Co
63. execution time of the diagnostic program Shows the total number of errors for each test item Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 37 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 4 Repair Request Sheet Thank you for purchasing the H8SX E6000H emulator In the event of a malfunction fill in the repair request sheet on the following pages and send it to your distributor Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 38 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Repair Request Sheet To Distributor Your company name Person in charge Tel Item Symptom 1 Date and time when the malfunction occurred Month Day Year at system initiation in system operation Circle either item in the braces 2 Frequency of generation of the malfunction Enter the appropriate numbers in the parentheses and circle one of the three items in the braces times in day s week s or month s 3 System configuration when the malfunction occurred 1 Enter the system configuration in use when the malfunction occurred 2 Was the user system connected Yes or no 3 Was the user system interface board connected Yes or no E6000H emulator HS1544EPH60H Serial No Revision The above items are written on the label for product management at the bottom of the emulator unit the serial no is the four digit number and the revision is the string of let
64. function has been executed once and the execution time is also displayed In this tutorial the minimum unit for time measurement is defined as 20 ns This value can be changed in the Configuration Properties dialog box No Name Condition RUN TIME MAX MIN TIME 0 10 20 30 1 PAL Range H 00002046 H 000020c4 14 O0h OOmin 00s OOims 303us 820ns 1 HHHHHHH 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 eT 4 Figure 4 61 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Displaying the Result 9 Delete the settings for performance analysis and delete the event points Click the right hand mouse button on the Performance Analysis window to display a popup menu Select Reset All from this popup menu to clear all of the settings Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window also displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this popup menu to delete all the event points that have been set Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 129 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 20 Profiling Function The profiling function allows the user measure the performance for each of the functions 1 Select Profile from the View menu to open the Profile window E S Ena Show Functions Variables JE oa TPM tist Tee 7 Figure 4 62 Profile Window List Sheet Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 130 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 2 To enable the profiling function click the righ
65. halted with the message Break Software Break in the status bar Note When the source file is displayed after a break a path of the source file may be inquired The location of the source file is as follows OS installation drive Workspace Tutorial E6000H 1650 Source The directory mentioned above cannot be specified depending on the version of the software In such cases specify the following directory instead High performance Embedded Workshop installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000H 1650 Source Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 90 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 24 void main void 25 26 while 1 27 000102a tutorial 28 29 30 sal 000102e void tutorial void 32 aa long j 34 int i 35 class Sample p sam 36 37 0001032 p_sam new Sample 38 0001050 for i O i lt 10 i 39 000103c 3 randi 40 0001044 1f 3 lt 0 41 0001046 Jeee 42 43 0001048 a i j 44 45 0001058 p_sam gt sort a 46 0001066 p_sam gt change a 47 48 000106e p_sam gt s0 a 0 49 0001072 p_sam gt si a 1 50 0001076 p_sam gt s2 a 2 51 000107a p_sam gt s3 a 3 52 000107e p_sam gt s4 a 4 s3 0001086 p_sam gt s5 a 5 54 000108e p_sam gt s6 a 6 55 0001096 p_sam gt s7 a 7 56 000109e p_sam gt s6 a 8 57 00010a6 p_sam gt s9 a 9 58 00010ae delete p sam 59 Tutorial cpp Figure
66. in the MCU and the Emulator Emulator MCU Register Name Power On Reset Reset CPU Power On Reset PC PC value indicated by PC value indicated by Undefined the power on reset the power on reset vector vector ERO to ER7 H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined CCR B 1XXXXXXX B 1XXXXXXX B 1XXXXXXX EXR B o1111111 Value before the reset B o1111111 MACH H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined MACL H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined VBR H 00000000 Value before the reset H 00000000 SBR H FFFFFFOO Value before the reset H FFFFFFOO Note X indicates an undefined bit Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 27 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 5 Notes Specific to the H8SX 1544 E6000H Emulator 3 5 1 Custom Device Function The maximum value selectable for the on chip ROM with the custom device functions of the H8SX 1544 E6000H emulator is 2 Mbytes Do not specify a value greater than 2 Mbytes 3 5 2 Subclock Operation This emulator does not support subclock operation Thus the following function and register cannot be used e WAT e Subclock control register SUBCKCR 3 5 3 Open Drain Control Registers PnRODR Restriction In the emulator the NMOS open drain output is disabled regardless of the setting of the bits while setting a bit of PnODR corresponding to TIOCB4 TIOCA4 TIOCAS TIOCBS A23 to A16 TxDS or SCKS as 1 enables an NMOS open drain
67. interface cable For connecting the user system interface cable connector d Trace cable For connecting the front end unit to the emulator station Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 5 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview 1 3 System Configuration The emulator must be connected to a host computer via the selected PC interface board PCI bus or PC card bus LAN adapter or USB adapter For details on the PC interface boards available for PCI bus and PC card bus specifications the LAN adapter and the USB adapter refer to the relevant descriptive documents 1 3 1 System Configuration Using Various Interfaces 1 PC Interface Board Figure 1 5 shows the configuration of a system in which the PC interface board is used The emulator can be connected to a host computer via a PC interface board option PCI bus or PC card bus Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the interface board in the host computer and connect the interface cable supplied with the PC interface board to the emulator Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the PC interface board in the host computer EJ PC interface board E6000H emulator PC interface cable PciF aT Host computer Figure 1 5 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board 2 LAN Adapter Figure 1 6 shows the configuration of a system in which the LAN adapter is used A LAN adapter can be used to connect the emul
68. left of the menu item When acquiring profile data of the program in which functions are called in a special way such as task switching in the OS stop tracing function calls 3 10 3 Executing the Program and Checking the Results After the user program has been executed and execution has been halted the results of measurement are displayed in the Profile window The Profile window has two sheets a List sheet and a Tree sheet Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 73 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 10 4 List Sheet Sample Sample 00001334 _ malloc _malloc __ free DIVL 3 _srand _rand __CALL_INIT operator new unsigned __INITSCT tutorial _tnain _sbrk Sample sort long HE eee ee ae ee ee Sh Gl 00002046 00002000 00001334 0000128E 00001284 000011cE 000011566 00001148 00001174 0000114 00001110 00001088 00000102E 00001024 00001000 H 00000054 H 00000080 H 00000046 H 00000000 H 000000A6G H 00000004 H OOOOO0BC H 00000000 H OOOOOO0E H OOOOO002E H OOOO001E H OOOO003E H 00000000 H 00000088 H 00000004 H 0000002A Eh tist tee 7 aau 15632 603 544 1203 147 318 2380 135 4120 268 331 88074 3151 63 268 Figure 3 43 Profile Window List Sheet This window displays the address and size of a function or a global variable the number of times the function is called or the global variable is accessed and profile data
69. of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the High performance Embedded Workshop is activated select Browse to another project workspace radio button and click the OK button Cancel if 2 C Open a recent project workspace Administration C Browse to another project workspace Figure 2 10 Welcome Dialog Box 2 The Open Workspace dialog box is displayed Select a directory in which you have created a workspace After that select the workspace file hws and click the Open button ai Look in a sample gt ck Ee sample File name sample hws Files of type Workspaces hws Md Cancel ZA Figure 2 11 Open Workspace Dialog Box 3 This activates the High performance Embedded Workshop and recovers the state of the selected workspace at the time it was saved When the saved state information of the selected workspace includes connection to the emulator the emulator will automatically be connected To connect the emulator when the saved state information does not include connection to the emulator refer to section 2 2 Connecting the Emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 10 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 Connecting the Emulator Select either of the following two ways to connect the
70. of times the on chip RAM has been written to can be included in the acquired trace information 1 Delete all the break conditions that have been set Click Reset All on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box to cancel trace conditions Check Free Trace on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box 2 Make the setting so that a break occurs at the address on the line that has p_sam gt s0 a 0 within the tutorial function H 0000106E in this example for details on refer to section 4 16 1 Software Break Function 3 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Execution stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the trace information 4 Select Statistic from the popup menu that is displayed when you click the right hand mouse button on the Trace window A message box appears indicating that the trace data is being loaded and the Statistic dialog box will be displayed Figure 4 48 Statistic Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 120 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 5 Select R W in the Item combo box and enter WR in the Start edit box Then click the New button R W WR will be displayed in the Condition column of the Result list box t ic Statistic Analysis Default Range ltem Figure 4 49 Statistic Dialog Box
71. output in the actual MCU Note however that P24 to P27 and PFO to PF7 can be used as NMOS open drain outputs 3 5 4 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit SSU Restriction If a conflict error occurs while the values of bits MSS and SCKS in an SSCRH register are 1 the MSS bit will be cleared and the corresponding SSCK pin will be switched to act as an input After that even if the user sets the SCKS bit to 0 to reconfigure the SSCK pin to act as an I O port pin the emulator will not set the SSCK pin up as an I O port pin To allow use of the SSCK pin as an I O port pin have the program write 0 to the MSS bit if a conflict error occurs This procedure is not necessary unless the SSCK pin is to be used as an I O port pin 3 5 5 Port Registers PORTx Restriction 1 When the module pins are used as inputs In the emulator undefined values are read from PORTx corresponding to the modules In the actual MCU however reading PORTx allows reading the states of the pins 2 When the module pins are used as outputs In the emulator undefined values are read from PORTx corresponding to the modules when the value of the data direction registers is 0 In the actual MCU however reading PORTx allows reading the states of the pins Peripheral modules that apply Motor control PWM timer 16 bit PWM RCAN SSU SDG and DA 3 5 6 Input Buffer Control Register PnICR Restriction In the actual device the input buffers are invalid and the inp
72. p_sam gt sort a p_sam gt change a p_sam gt sO a 0 p_sam gt si a 1 p_sam gt sz a 2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 p_sam gt s4 a 4 p_sam gt s5 a 5 p_sam gt s6 a 6 p_sam gt s7 a 7 p_sam gt s68 a 8 p_sam gt s9 a 9 delete p_ sam Figure 4 36 Editor Window at Execution Stop Software Break Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 109 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial The Status window displays the following contents O x Item sid sS C OCOCC COCOC CNYCQU Connected To H8Sx 1650 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 E6000H H UDI USB Driver CPU H85X 1650 Mode 4 Clock source 12MHz Cause of last break Software Break RunTime Count OO0hOOminOOs009ms996us880ns Method of RunTime Count Go to Break Selection TASK ID NOT AVAILABLE 4 I R Memory Platform A Events 7 Figure 4 37 Displayed Contents of the Status Window Software Break Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 110 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 16 2 On Chip Break Function Setting of an on chip breakpoint on channel 4 such that a break is triggered when the break condition has been satisfied five times is explained as an example of the use of on chip breakpoints Note The channels on which
73. selectable for the on chip ROM with the custom device functions of the H8SX 1650 E6000H emulator is 2 Mbytes Do not specify a value greater than 2 Mbytes 3 5 2 Exception Processing of Sleep Instructions The emulator does not support exception processing of sleep instructions Even if the SLPIE bit of the standby control register SBYCR is set to 1 the emulator enters the power down mode and no exception processing of sleep instructions occurs MCUs that apply H8SX 1650C H8SX 1653 H8SX 1654 H8SX 1651 H8SX 1663 H8SX 1664 H8SX 1642 H8SX 1644 H8SX 1648 H8SX 1632 H8SX 1634 H8SX 1638 H8SX 1653R H8SX 1654R H8SX 1658R H8SX 1663R H8SX 1664R and H8SX 1668R 3 5 3 Subclock Operation This emulator does not support subclock operation Thus the following function and register cannot be used e 32k timer e Subclock control register SUBCKCR of the clock pulse generator e Interrupt priority register D IPRD to IPRDO MCUs that apply H8SX 1663 H8SX 1664 H8SX 1663R H8SX 1664R and H8SX 1668R Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 57 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 58 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure This section describes the diagnostic test procedure using the E6000H diagnostic program 4 1 System Set Up for Diagnostic Program Execution 6 To execute the diagnostic program use the fo
74. situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTE emphasizes essential information Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page IV of VIII REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS AWARNING Observe the precautions listed below Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Carefully handle the emulator product to prevent receiving an electric shock because the emulator product has a DC power supply Do not repair or remodel the emulator product by yourself for electric shock prevention and quality assurance Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Always before connecting make sure that pin 1 on both sides are correctly aligned Supply power according to the power specifications and do not apply an incorrect power voltage Use only the provided AC power cable Use only the specified type of fuse Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page V of VIII RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Warnings on Emulator Usage Warnings described below apply as long as you use this emulator Be sure to read and understand the warnings below before using this emulator Note that these are the main warnings not the complete list AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Failure to do so will result in a
75. stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the E6000H station and the front end unit are placed in a secure position so that they do not move and impose stress on the user interface while being used 2 Make sure the power supply is off Before connecting the emulator to the user system check that the emulator and the user system are turned off 3 Connect Vcc to the user system power The emulator monitors and determines whether the user system is turned on or off by the Vcc pins After connecting the user system to the emulator via the user system interface cable be sure to supply power to the Vcc pins Otherwise the emulator assumes that the user system is not connected When the user system is connected check that the power of the user system is supplied to these pins Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 11 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 4 Connecting the External Probe CAUTION Check the external probe direction and connect the external probe to the emulator station correctly Incorrect connection will damage the probe or connector When an external probe is connected to the external probe connector on the emulator s front end unit it enables external signal tracing and multibreak detection Figure 2 2 shows the external probe connector External probe External probe connector HS 1527KEPH6OH cosa PCN2 RENESAS Note T
76. system interface board g IC socket User system Figure 1 1 Emulator Hardware Components Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 2 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 2 1 E6000H Station Components A Part of Photos may be Different from Real Appearances The names of the components on the front rear panel of the E6000H station are listed below Front Panel EBO0DH tpus as Figure 1 2 E6000H Station Front Panel a POWER lamp Is lit up while the E6000H station is supplied with power b RUN lamp Is lit up while the user program is running Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 3 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview Rear Panel a b Figure 1 3 E6000H Station Rear Panel a Power switch Turning this switch to input supplies power to the emulator E6000H station and evaluation chip board b AC power connector For an AC 100 V to 240 V power supply c PC interface cable connector For the PC interface cable that connects the host computer to the E6000H station A PC interface board PC card interface LAN adapter or USB adapter can be connected Marked PC IF Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 4 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 2 2 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration The names of the components on the evaluation chip board of the emulator are listed below b 1 Top view of evaluation chip board 2 Bottom view of e
77. the appropriate numbers in the parentheses and circle one of the three items in the braces times in day s week s or month s 3 System configuration when the malfunction occurred 1 Enter the system configuration in use when the malfunction occurred 2 Was the user system connected Yes or no 3 Was the user system interface board connected Yes or no E6000H emulator HS1650EPH60H Serial No Revision The above items are written on the label for product management at the bottom of the emulator unit the serial no is the four digit number and the revision is the string of letters following the number Host interface PCI interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EIC02H PC card interface HS6000EIP01H or HS6000EIP02H LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H Circle either item in the braces Serial No Revision These are impressed on the circuit board Provided CD R HS1650EPH60SR Version V Shown as V x xxrx on the CD R x numeral Host computer in use Manufacturer Type number OS Windows 98SE Windows Me Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Type number Circle either item in the braces Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 67 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Item Symptom 4 Settings when the malfunction occurred Enter the operational settin
78. this break condition regardless of their values Selects the data access size a Sets access type bus status and read write cycle conditions Sets access type conditions Sets bus status conditions When Don t Care has been selected no bus status condition can be set Sets read write conditions When Don t Care has been selected no read write condition can be set Sets the satisfaction count of the condition When Don t Care has been selected the satisfaction count is defined as 1 Break Halts execution when the selected condition has been satisfied After execution Halts execution after the address at which the condition has been satisfied Before execution Halts execution before the address at which the condition is satisfied Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 39 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 7 3 Settings an On Emulator Breakpoint Use the On Emulator sheet on the Event window to display change or add settings for on emulator breakpoints Select Add or Edit from the popup menu displayed on the On Chip sheet The Breakpoint Properties dialog box the On Emulator Break page will appear Breakpoint Prope Software Break On Chip Break On Emulator Break m Sequential Break mm 2 A Count M Run time count between trigger outputs F From 4 to 3 Back 1 address H 00001000 Figure 3 24 Breakpoint Properties Dia
79. this menu to delete all the on chip breakpoints Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 112 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 17 Trace Functions The trace functions of the emulator use the realtime trace buffer which can store the information of up to 128 k bus cycles The content of this buffer which is constantly updated during execution is displayed in the Trace window Select Trace from the Code submenu of the View menu or click the Trace toolbar button to display the Trace window ee R E e AEA eit ta PIR InstructionAddcess Code Address Varinblelabel Date B W SZ Status Area TASK Probes IRQ Timestamp Tinestemp Differesce Source Labt Figure 4 40 Trace Window When trace information is displayed in the Trace window clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information The following sections give an overview of the trace functions and the settings Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 113 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 17 1 Displaying Trace Information by the Free Trace Function The free trace function allows continuous acquisition of trace information from the start of user program execution to the occurrence of a break 1 All break conditions must be deleted Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a popup menu Select Acquisit
80. variables in the Function Variable column 4 Only Executed Functions Only displays the executed functions If a stack information file sni extension output from the optimizing linkage editor does not exist in the directory where the load module is located only the executed functions are displayed even if this check box is not checked 5 Include Data of Child Functions Sets whether or not to display information for a child function called in the function as profile data e Properties This popup menu is unavailable in the H8SX E6000H emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 76 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 11 Profile Chart Window tutorial Figure 3 45 Profile Chart Window This window displays the relation of calls for a specific function This window displays the calling relation for the function specified in the List sheet or Tree sheet in the Profile window The specified function is displayed in the middle the calling function on the left side and the called function on the right side Values beside the calling and called functions show the number of times the function has been called Right clicking on the mouse within the window displays a popup menu Supported menu options are described in the following sections e View Source Displays the source program or disassembled memory contents for the address of the function on which the cursor is placed when the ri
81. who elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas Technology Corp its affiliated companies and their officers directors and employees against any and all damages arising out of such applications 9 You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges 10 Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products IC products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures Among others since the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you 11 In case Renesas pro
82. 0 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Figures 3 1 shows the external dimensions and mass of the E6000H emulator External dimensions of the E6000H emulator station 222 0 External dimensions of the evaluation chip board 100 0 Mass of the emulator 3 0 kg Unit mm Tolerance 1 0 mm Figure 3 1 External Dimensions and Mass of the Emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 30 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 3 User System Interface Circuit 3 3 1 User System Interface Circuit The circuits that interface the evaluation chip in the emulator to the user system include buffers and resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware compensating for FANIN FANOUT and propagation delays The AC timing values when using the emulator are shown in table 3 2 Note The values with the emulator connected in table 3 2 are measurements for reference and are not guaranteed values Table 3 2 Bus Timing when Using the Emulator Bus Clock of the H8SX 1600 series MCU 35 0 MHz MCU Specifications ns Values with Emulator Connected ns Item Min Max Min Max tRDS1 15 16 The basic bus cycle software wait is shown in figure 3 2 The user system interface circuits connected to the user system are shown in figure 3 3 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 31 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130
83. 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 139 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product Table 5 1 Selectable Target Platforms Debugging Description Hardware Platform H8SX 1650 E6000H Select this debugging platform when the H8SX 1650 E6000H HS1650EPH60H Emulator CPU 1600 emulator is in use The H8SX 1650 H8SX 1657F H8SX 1651 or H8SX 1650C can be emulated H8SX 1653 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 Select this debugging platform to emulate the H8SX 1653 or H8SX 1654 Note that the user system interface board HS1650EPH60H HS1653ECN61H Emulator CPU 1600 emulator is in use The H8SX 1544 or H8SX 1543 can be emulated HS1653ECN61H is required for emulation of the H8SX 1653 and H8SX 1654 H8SX 1663 E6000H Select this debugging platform to emulate the H8SX 1663 or HS1650EPH60H Emulator CPU 1600 H8SX 1664 Note that the user system interface board HS1664ECH61H HS1664ECH61H is required for emulation of the H8SX 1663 and H8SX 1664 H8SX 1527 E6000H Select this debugging platform when the H8SX 1527 E6000H HS1527KEPH60H Emulator CPU 1600 emulator is in use The H8SX 1525 H8SX 1527 or H8SX 1582 can be emulated H8SX 1527R Select this debugging platform when the H8SX 1527R E6000H HS1527REPH60H E6000H Emulator emulator is in use The H8SX 1525R H8SX 1527R or H8SX 1582 CPU 1600 can be emulated H8SX 1544 E6000H Select this debugging platform when the H8SX 1544 E6000H
84. 0001032 0001050 000103 0001044 0001046 0001048 0001058 0001066 000106e 0001072 0001076 000107a 000107e 0001086 000108e 0001096 000109e 00010a6 00010ae void main void while 1 tutorial void tutorial void long j int i class Sample p_ sam p_sam new Sample for i O i lt 10 i j rand TE lt Oji I se ail 32 p_sam gt sort a p_sam gt change a p_sam gt sO a QO p_sam gt sl a 1 p_sam gt s2 a 2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 p_sam gt s4 a 4 p_sam gt s5 a 5 p_sam gt s6 a 6 p_sam gt s7 a 7 p_sam gt s8 a 8 p_sam gt s9 a 9 delete p_ sam Tutorial cpp Figure 4 5 Editor Window Displaying the Source Program e Select a font and size that are legible if necessary Initially the Editor window shows the start of the user program but the user can use the scroll bar to scroll through the user program and look at the other statements RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 87 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 5 Setting a Software Breakpoint A software breakpoint is a simple debugging function The Editor window provides a very simple way of setting a software breakpoint at any point in a program For example to set a software breakpoint where the sort function is called e Select by double clicking the S W Breakpoints column on the line containing the sort function call xi E F T
85. 00H Emulators 3 5 1 Custom Device Function 3 5 2 Non availability of P2 Open Drain Outputs 3 5 3 Limitations on Control of the SSU Pins Section4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 1 System Set Up for Diagnostic Program Execution 4 2 Test Item of the Diagnostic Program HS 1527KEPH60H 4 3 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program 44 Test Item of the Diagnostic Program HS1527REPH60H 4 5 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program 4 6 Repair Request Sheet Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page IV of X REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS H8SX 1544 Hardware Patt cccccccccccssccesscccesseceeseeesseeccsseeesseecesseeesseeeesuecessuecesaeecsseesesseeseseeeeseeeessees 1 Section 1 Overview 1 1 Notes on Usage 1 2 Emulator Hardware Components 1 2 1 E6000H Station Components A Part of Photos may be Different from Real Appearances 1 2 2 Front end Unit Configuration 1 3 System Configuration 1 3 1 System Configuration Using Various Interfaces Section 2 Prepatation before USEsrsocersarrisiisecrseikss irisaren snes arara Ee EENEN PAESE EV EENES A 9 2 1 Description on Emulator Usage 2 2 Emulator Connection 10 2 2 1 Connecting the Emulator to the User System LO 2 2 2 Connecting the User System Interface Cable 10 2 2 3 Precautions on Connecting the User System sald 2 2 4 Connecting the External Probe 12 2 2 5 Selecting the Clock 13 2 2
86. 0J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 4 Table 4 2 shows the test items of this diagnostic program Table 4 2 Test Items of the Diagnostic Program Test Item of the Diagnostic Program HS1527REPH60H Test No Test Item Description 1 Main Board Access Register test in the E6000H main board 2 Emulation Board Access Register test in the E6000H emulation board 3 Evaluation Board Access Register test in the E6000H s front end unit 4 Basic Function Test of the basic functions 5 GO to BREAK Time Measurement Test of the execution time measurement function Emulation Monitor Test of the emulation monitor G A Break Function Test of the G A break function G A Performance Analysis Function Test of the G A performance measurement function 9 G A Monitor Function Test of the G A monitoring function 10 G A Parallel RAM Monitor Test of the G A parallel RAM monitoring function 11 G A Trace Function Test of the G A trace function 12 Combination Test of several functions in combination 13 Parallel Access Test of the parallel access function 14 H8SX 1527R Register Read Write Test of registers in the SUB MCU 15 FPGA Parallel RAM Function Test of the FPGA s parallel RAM monitoring function Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 36 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 5 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program Insert the CD R HS1650EPH6O0SR s
87. 1 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 46 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications User system SN74CB3Q3306A P16 P15 SN74CB3Q3306A P14 Sub MCU SCK5 RxD5 TxD5 Figure 3 17 User System Interface Circuits with HS1668RECH61H Connected 3 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 47 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications Sub MCU EPM3256ATC User system 47kQ MD3 Monitoring circuit LPT16244 47 kQ MD_CLK PMO PM4 VBUS Figure 3 18 User System Interface Circuits with HS1668RECH61H Connected 4 User system MCU Vec VHC244 EPM7128 UHC14 _RES EPM7128 Figure 3 19 User System Interface Circuits with HS1668RECH61H Connected 5 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 48 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU User system P13 PB6 EPM3256ATC Sub MCU ADTRGO Figure 3 20 User System Interface Circuits with HS1668RECHN61H Connected 6 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 49 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU SN74CBTLV3257 User system PDO PD7 PJO PJ7 PEO PE7 PKO PK7 PDO PD7 PEO PE7 SN74CB3Q3306A PJ2 PJ3 PK2 PK7 PJO PJ PJ4 PJ5 PJ6 PJ7 PKO PK1 ie SN74CB3Q3306A Sub MCU TIOCA6 TIOCB6 TIOCA7 TIOCB7 TIOCA8 TIOCB8 TIOCA9 TIOCB9
88. 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 7 Emulator State and Internal Modules Operation of some internal modules depends on the emulator s state Table 3 4 shows the relation between the emulator s state and operation of the internal modules Table 3 4 Emulator s State and Operation of Internal Modules Operation During Operation while Emulation Emulation is Halted Execution or Step Internal Module Break Execution DMAC DMA controller Yes Yes EXDMAC EXDMAC controller Yes Yes DTC data transfer controller Yes Yes TPU 16 bit timer pulse unit Yes Yes PPG programmable pulse generator Yes Yes MTU multi function timer pulse unit Yes Yes TMR 8 bit timer Yes Yes WDT watchdog timer No Yes SCI serial communication interface Yes Yes SCIF serial communication interface with Yes Yes FIFO IIC2 IIC bus interface 2 Yes Yes A D converter Yes Yes D A converter Yes Yes 1 O port Yes Yes H UDI user debugging interface Not available Not available Note The user cannot use the H UDI because it is being used by the emulator RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 55 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 8 Differences in Values of Registers Note that certain general and control registers of both emulators are initialized whenever the system is activated or the evaluation chip is reset by a command
89. 130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU P10 to P17 P20 to P27 P30 to P37 P40 to P43 P50 to P57 AVcc AVss AVref User system P10 to P17 P20 to P27 P30 to P37 Note The H8SX 1653 does not have P30 to P37 P40 to P43 P50 to P57 AVcc I 0 022 uF M1 NC lt __ AVss 0 022 pF Poo o AVref Figure 3 5 User System Interface Circuits 3 RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 35 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU User system P60 to P65 P60 to P65 PAO LPT16244 Pe PAI PAI PA3 to PAZ PAS to PA7 PBO to PB3 PBO to PB3 PDO to PD7 PDO to PD7 PEO to PE7 PEO to PE7 PFO to PF7 PFO to PF7 Note The H8SX 1653 does not have PF5 to PF7 PHO to PH7 PHO to PH7 PIO to PI7 PIO to PI7 Figure 3 6 User System Interface Circuits 4 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 36 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications Sub MCU Voc User system MD control i Monitoring ae circuit LPT16244 MD_CLK PMo PM4 EPM7128 VBUS DrVcc USD USD DrVss M1 Vcc User system EPM7128 UHC14 VHC244 PE _RES _RES EPM7128 MCU SN74CB3Q3306A User system P23 SN74CB3Q3306A P27 MCU User system SN74CB3Q3306A P14 P14 Sub MCU SN74CB3Q3306A TXD Figure 3 7 User System Interface Circuits with HS1653ECN61H Connected Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 37 of 68 RENESAS R
90. 1544 PCCD Enter 3 LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H gt TM1544 ELN Enter 4 USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H gt TM1544 USB Enter The High performance Embedded Workshop must be installed before the test program is executed Be sure to initiate the diagnostic program from lt Drive gt Diag 1544 Do not initiate it from a directory other than lt Drive gt Diag 1544 such as gt lt Drive gt Diag 1544 TM1544 PCI Enter If the diagnostic program is initiated when the current directory is not lt Drive gt Diag 1544 the diagnostic program will not operate correctly When S is added to the command line as in gt TM1544 PCI S Enter steps 1 to 15 will be repeatedly executed To stop execution in this case enter Q Notes 1 lt Drive gt is the drive name of the CD ROM drive 2 Do not remove the CD R from the CD ROM drive during execution of the test program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 33 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure The following messages are displayed during the test There are 15 steps in this test Message H8SX 1544 E6000H Emulator Tests V Copyright c 2003 Renesas Technology Corp Loain AVAVES g ppor PP ble x eee EANNAN OK Use PCI Initializing driver seere niisssriss tanka OK Searching for interface card OK Checking emulator is connected OK Emulator board information Main board ID H Emulation board ID H Normal sta
91. 2 Preparation before Use Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 Method for Activating High performance Embedded Workshop To activate the High performance Embedded Workshop follow the procedure listed below 1 Connect the emulator to the host computer 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the connector of the emulator if you use the user system interface cable This is not necessary when you do not use the user system interface cable Turn on the emulator Be sure to turn on the user system before supplying power to the emulator if you use the user system 3 Activate the High performance Embedded Workshop from Programs in the Start menu 4 The Welcome dialog box is displayed pes BY 9 Cancel Open a recent project workspace Administration nmm C Browse to another project workspace Figure 2 1 Welcome Dialog Box Create a new project workspace radio button Creates a new workspace Open a recent project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace and displays the history of the opened workspace Browse to another project workspace radio button Uses an existing workspace this radio button is used when the history of the opened workspace does not remain In this section we describe the following three ways to start up the High performance Embedded Workshop e Create a new project workspace a toolchain is not in use e Create a new project workspace
92. 2c wR z C 1 tut alir sm OOffoff4 OOfFH40O wR L DATA INRAM u void tut 34 2 wv L ERO RO 00002004 1a 0f020 AD PROG 16 nani t 02154 00001000 Mv ERZ 2i 0000100c Gas0Of8i AD L PROG EMU 16 i111 char abrk sise_t saze 01446 OOO02066 ST L ER 5 OOffbfe0 O0O0OC00 wR L DATA INRAM 1111 void Sanple sort long a Figure 4 53 Trace Window Function Calls 5 To return the display in the Trace window to its previous state follow the procedure in 3 to display the Function Call Display dialog box Click the Disable button and then the OK button 6 Delete the event points that have been set and clear the trace information Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from this menu to delete all the event points that have been set Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 124 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 18 Stack Trace Function The emulator uses the information on the stack to display the function call history Notes 1 This function can be used only when the load module that has the Dwarf2 type debugging information is loaded Such load modules are supported in H8S H8 300 C C compiler V4 0 or later 2 For details on the stack trace function refer to the online help e D
93. 2n 2 for the conditional trace respectively and then check Combination with the next channel Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 53 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 8 4 Searching for a Trace Record Use the Trace Find dialog box to search for a trace record To open this dialog box choose Find from the popup menu Trace Find x Area Status Probes 101 102 BEM F BEM E Timestamp InstructionAddress Data Address RA Trace search range J Not designation D Upward search Start PTR 131071 EndPTRi fo Cancel Apply Figure 3 30 Trace Find Dialog Box The Trace Find dialog box has the following options General Sets the range for searching Not designation Searches for information that does not match the conditions set in other pages when this box is checked Upward search Searches upwards when this box is checked Start PTR Enters a PTR value to start a search End PTR Enters a PTR value to end a search InstructionAddress Set an instruction address condition Don t care Detects no address when this box is checked Value Detects the specified instruction address Enter an address value Data Set a data condition Don t care Detects no data when this box is checked Value Detects the specified data Enter a data value Address Set an address condition Don t care Detects no address when this box is checked V
94. 4 5 6 7 8 9 a B c D 2 F Value OOFFB400 00 OO 12 D9 OO OO OA 69 OO OO 1D 24 OO OO SD 42 i 1B OOFFB410 00 OO 514 4c OO OO 6A B4 OO OO 6B c2 OO OO 7B 4c QL 4 k L Figure 4 71 Monitor Window during Execution 5 After you have finished checking the states in the Monitor window select Halt Program from the Debug menu to halt the program s execution 4 22 What Next In this tutorial some of the main features of the emulator and the High performance Embedded Workshop operation have been given By using the emulation functions provided by the emulator a high level debugging is possible The conditions caused by hardware and software can be accurately classified and the users can investigate the problems effectively Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 137 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 138 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product This section describes the software specifications and notes specific to the H8SX E6000H emulator 5 1 Supported Hardware This emulator software is specialized for the H8SX E6000H emulator 5 2 Target Platforms The following debugging platforms can be selected in this emulator The target MCUs to be emulated depend on the selected debugging platform Rev 11
95. 4 10 Editor Window Break Status Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 91 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial The user can see the cause of the break that occurred last time in the Status window e Select Status from the CPU submenu of the View menu or click the Status toolbar button After the Status window is displayed open the Platform sheet and check the Status of Cause of last break Item Status Connected To H8SxX 1650 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 E6000H H UDI USB Driver CPU H8Sx 1650 Mode 4 Clock source 12MHz Cause of last break Software Break RunTime Count OOhOOmin00s008ms291us500ns Method of RunTime Count Go to Break Selection TASK ID NOT AVAILABLE 4 I gt iN Memory h Platform Events 7 Figure 4 11 Status Window Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 92 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 8 Reviewing Breakpoints The user can see all the breakpoints set in the program in the Event window e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu or click the Eventpoints toolbar button e The Event window is displayed Select the Software sheet CM dix Bf X Type Software Enable PC 00001058 Tutorial cpp 45 Break TIP software
96. 44 E6000H series products Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 10 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 3 Precautions on Connecting the User System When connecting the emulator to the user system note the following 1 Secure the E6000H station location Place the E6000H station and the E6000H s front end unit so that the trace cable is not bent or twisted as shown below A bent or twisted cable will impose stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the E6000H station and the front end unit are placed in a secure position so that they do not move and impose stress on the user interface while being used 2 Make sure the power supply is off Before connecting the emulator to the user system check that the emulator and the user system are turned off 3 Connect Vcc to the user system power The emulator monitors and determines whether the user system is turned on or off by the Vcc pins After connecting the user system to the emulator via the user system interface cable be sure to supply power to the Vcc pins Otherwise the emulator assumes that the user system is not connected When the user system is connected check that the power of the user system is supplied to these pins Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 11 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 4 Connecting the External Probe CAUTION Check the external pr
97. 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 ag 45 46 47 0002000 0002010 0002014 0002018 000201c 0002020 0002026 o00202c 0002032 0002038 000203e 0002046 0002050 0002 0ac 00020a4 000209 0002072 0002094 0002098 00020b2 Sample Sample s0 0 s1 0 s2 0 33 0 s4 0 s5 0 s6 0 s7 0 s8 0 s9 0 void Sample sort long taj long t int i J kK gapi gap 5 while gap gt 0 jf for k 0 k lt gap k for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap for j i gap j gt k j3 j gap ifia j gt a j gap t alj a j alitgap a j gap t else break gap gap 2 lt gt Tutorial cpp SORT CPP Figure 4 23 Editor Window Step In e The highlighted line moves to the first statement of the sort function in the Editor window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 101 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 13 2 Executing the Step Out Command The Step Out command steps out of the called function and stops at the next statement of the calling statement e To step out of the sort function select Step Out from the Debug menu or click the Step Out button in the toolbar Figure 4 24 Step Out Button void main void while 1 000102a tutorial 000102e void tutorial void long j int i a Seek nanie ie iix 0001032 p_sam nev S
98. 6 Connecting the System Ground 5 2 2 7 PC Interface Board Specifications 16 Section 3 Hardware Specifications nosserurmeereiiiiriisniriiiiiyisenieis i gnd irea EEEE ri i e E ias 17 3 1 Environmental Conditions 17 3 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass 18 3 3 User System Interface Circuit 19 3 3 1 User System Interface Circuit 3 4 Support of the Target MCU 3 4 1 Memory Space 3 4 2 Power Down Modes Sleep Software Standby Hardware Standby and All Module Clock Stop 3 4 3 Interrupts 3 4 4 Control Input Signals RES NMI and STBY 3 4 5 Watchdog Timer WDT 3 4 6 A D Converter 3 4 7 Emulator State and Internal Modules 3 4 8 Differences in Values of Registers 3 5 Notes Specific to the H8SX 1544 E6000H Emulator 3 5 1 Custom Device Function 3 5 2 Subclock Operation 3 5 3 Open Drain Control Registers PnODR Restriction 3 5 4 Synchronous Serial Communication Unit SSU Restriction 3 5 5 Port Registers PORTx Restriction 3 5 6 Input Buffer Control Register PnICR Restriction 3 5 7 Watch Timer WAT Restriction 3 5 8 Port Function Control Register 4 PFCR4 Note 3 5 9 Access to the Internal RAM Note 3 5 10 External Expanded Mode Restrictions ie 3 5 11 Port Function Control Register B PFCRB Note 0 cceececcecceeeeceeeseeeeseesceeeecaeeeseeeeeaeeaseeeeeseeeaeeaeeates Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 1 System Set Up for Diagnostic Prog
99. 68 P25 94 VSS_26 69 P26 95 PEO 70 P27 96 PE1 71 VSS_18 97 PE2 72 98 PE3 73 99 VSS_27 74 100 VSS_28 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 14 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H cont User I F1 Pin No Signal Name User I F 1 Pin No Signal Name UCN1 101 PE4 UCN1 127 VSS_35 102 PES 128 PAO 103 PE6 129 PA1 104 PE7 130 PA2 105 VSS_29 131 PA3 106 VSS_30 132 PA4 107 PFO 133 PAS 108 PF1 134 PA6 109 PF2 135 PA7 110 PF3 136 VSS_36 111 VSS_31 137 PBO 112 VSS_32 138 PB1 113 PF4 139 PB2 114 PF5 140 PB3 115 PF6 141 116 PF7 142 117 VSS_33 143 118 VSS_34 144 119 145 VSS_37 120 146 121 147 122 148 123 149 124 150 125 151 126 152 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 15 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H cont User I F1 Pin No Signal Name User I F 1 Pin No Signal Name UCN1 153 VSS_38 UCN1 177 VSS_46 154 VSS_39 178 VSS_47 155 PHO 179 156 PH1 180 157 PH2 181 158 PH3 182 159 VSS_40 183 VSS_48 160 VSS_41 184
100. 8SX 1527R E6000H and H8SX 1544 E6000H emulators incorporate a dedicated on chip RAM monitor of 256 bytes x 12 points for the watch function that only allows the contents of the on chip RAM to be displayed in realtime Enabling Auto Update after registering variables automatically allows use of this on chip RAM monitor while disabling Auto Update or deleting variables cancels use of the on chip RAM monitor When Auto Update is enabled while all of the 12 points of this on chip RAM monitor are in use the values will be updated by reading data as usual To display the contents of memory other than the on chip RAM in realtime use the normal monitor Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 33 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 7 Using the Event Points The emulator has the event point function to support breakpoints of the following three types Software breakpoints Execution of the user program stops when the instruction at the specified address is fetched Up to 255 software breakpoints can be set Any content at the specified address is replaced by a break instruction a dedicated instruction for use with the emulator The software breakpoint cannot be set in the write protected area such as ROM area or flash memory area on the user system The user can set a software breakpoint in the Editor or Disassembly window On chip breakpoints These break functions built in the MCU Conditions on the address bus data bus bus area a
101. 9 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 11 RTOS Extension Function 5 11 1 Input Values for the TASK ID writing area Input Edit Box Specify the address to which the task IDs are written Set an integer multiple of eight within the on chip I O area that does not contain I O registers The address ranges for the on chip I O area are H OOFFEAO0 to H 00OFFFE00 and H 00FFFF20 to H 0OFFFFFC Table 5 6 shows examples of input values for the TASK ID writing area input edit box for particular debugging platforms Table 5 6 Examples of Input Values for the TASK ID writing area Input Edit Box Example of Input Value for the TASK ID Debugging Platform writing area Input Edit Box H8SX 1650 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1653 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1663 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1527 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1527R E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1544 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1638 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1648 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1658 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 H8SX 1668 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 H OOFFFBE8 5 11 2 Debugging Area for the E6000H Emulator For the debugging area for the E6000H emulator refer to section 5 Configuration in the HI1000 4 User s Manual 5 11 3 Note o
102. AS Section 4 Tutorial Note The addresses figured out in the Input Function Range dialog box are just for reference In some cases the end address of a function may be incorrect Check the last instruction of the function in the Disassembly window to correct the value set in End Address so that it will be the address of the last instruction in general the last instruction of a function is a RTS instruction A label name or an expression can be entered instead of an address value in boxes where an address should be entered 6 Click the OK button to display the contents that has been set for line 1 of the No column in the Performance Analysis window This completes the settings for measuring the time within the specified range No Name Condition Rate RUN TIME MAX MIN TIME 0 10 20 30 1 PAL Range H 00002046 H 000020c4 0 OOh OOmin 00s O00ms O00us 000ns o 2 3 4 5 6 4 8 gt Figure 4 60 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Setting Completed 7 Set a software breakpoint at the address on the line that has p_sam gt change a within the tutorial function H 00001066 in this example Refer to section 4 16 1 Software Break Function 8 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Execution stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Performance Analysis window then displays the information shown below The value shown in the Count column is 1 which indicates that the sort
103. CK 2 CLOCK 4 or CLOCK 8 Enable interrupts during step execution When this box is checked interrupts are accepted during step execution Break on access error When this box is checked a break the user program stops occurs if your program accesses a guarded memory area or writes to a write protected area Enable internal ROM area write When this box is checked writing to the on chip ROM area is enabled For the result of writing see the Status window Enable DTC parallel access When this box is checked reading and writing of memory contents by parallel accesses are enabled User VCC Threshold Sets the voltage level for the user system Down will be displayed in User VCC of the Extended Monitor window when the actual user VCC of the target system is lower than the specified value User Signals When this box is checked the selected signal from the user system is enabled Bus Timeout Select the bus timeout detection time 100us 1 6ms 13ms or 210ms can be selected User IRQ enable Specify an IRQ for the trace or break condition IRQO to IRQ15 are available and they can be specified by entering values in hexadecimal Each of the bits corresponds to an IRQ The bit location indicates the IRQ number for example bit D15 for IRQ15 Setting a bit to 1 allows monitoring the corresponding IRQ If several IRQs are specified the values will be ORed and this result will be appl
104. Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window displays a further popup menu Select Clear from this menu to clear the trace information Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 123 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 17 5 Function Calls This mechanism is only used to collect trace information on the function calls 1 Make the setting so that a break occurs at the address on the line that has p_sam gt sO0 a 0 within the tutorial function H 0000106e in this example for details refer to section 4 16 1 Software Break Function 2 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Execution stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the trace information 3 Select Function Call from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the Trace window The Function Call Display dialog box will be displayed Setting ae to display trace information with function call only Function Gall Display Figure 4 52 Function Call Display Dialog Box 4 Click the Enable radio button and then the OK button Only the information on function calls is now displayed in the Trace window lolx e Aa SE 8 lm rm InstructionAddress Code Address Date Rw sz TASK Probes 280 Source 77 0000400 W L ol 408 Se0010b8 BD L 1111 2 entry vect 0 void Poweron BSP oot 9 000010
105. EIU02H gt TM1650 USB Enter The High performance Embedded Workshop must be installed before the test program is executed Be sure to initiate the diagnostic program from lt Drive gt Diag 1650 Do not initiate it from a directory other than lt Drive gt Diag 1650 such as gt lt Drive gt Diag TM1650 PCI Enter If the diagnostic program is initiated when the current directory is not lt Drive gt Diag 1650 the diagnostic program will not operate correctly When S is added to the command line as in gt TM1650 PCI S Enter steps 1 to 13 will be repeatedly executed To stop execution in this case enter Q Notes 1 lt Drive gt is the drive name of the CD ROM drive 2 Do not remove the CD R from the CD ROM drive during execution of the test program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 61 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure The following messages are displayed during the test There are 13 steps in this test Message Description E6000H H8SX 1650 Emulator Tests V Copyright c 2003 Renesas Technology Corp TiGAGING Grive 65S kidsshsphaditnstanareeeacderereea OK Use PCI Tnitialdzing river iiss caccccccaaeenes OK Searching for interface card OK Checking emulator is connected OK Emulator board information Main board ID H Emulation board ID H Normal started at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 62 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS
106. EJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications Sub CY Voc User system Monitoring circuit EPM7128 MD3 Vcc MD control Monitoring areal circuit LPT16244 47 kQ MD_CLK ET PM0 PM4 EES EPM7128 VBUS aus 1kQ DrVcc Bales circuit USD ia lt ries DrVss DrVss WT Vcc User system EPM7128 UHC14 47 kQ ae _RES EPM7128 MCU SN74CB3Q3306A User system P23 on SN74CB3Q3306A P27 MCU SN74CB3Q3306A User system P14 ia Sub MCU SN74CB3Q3306A TXD Figure 3 8 User System Interface Circuits with HS1664ECH61H Connected Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 38 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU SN74CBTLV3257 User system PDO PD7 PJO PJ7 PEO PE7 PKO PK7 SN74CB3Q3306A PDO PD7 PEO PE7 PJ2 PJ3 PK2 PK7 PJO PJ1 PJ4 PJ5 PJ6 PJ7 PKO PK1 SN74CB3Q3306A 7 kQ Sub MCU TIOCA6 TIOCB6 TIOCA7 TIOCB7 TIOCA8 TIOCB8 TIOCAQ TIOCB9 PO16 PO23 PO24 PO31 MCU User system Vcc P30 P31 47KQ P34 e P35 P36 P37 P20 P21 Sub MCU TIOCAO TIOCBO TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 Figure 3 9 User System Interface Circuits with HS1648ECH61H Connected 1 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 39 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU SN74CB3Q3306A User system
107. Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics C 7 D T on lt D D tENESAS H8SX E6000H Emulator User s Manual Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System H8SX Family H8SX 1600 Series H8SX 1500 Series HS1650EPH60HE Renesas Electronics Rev 11 00 2009 01 www renesas com Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page ii of iv REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Notes regarding these materials This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate Renesas products for their use Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in this document 2 Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising out of the use of any information in this document including but not limited to product data diagrams charts programs algorithms and a
108. HAHHHRH OJN EWN Figure 3 36 Performance Analysis Window This window displays the rate of execution time in the area selected by the user during the last program run in percentages histogram or numerical values It is possible to hide any column not necessary in the Performance Analysis window Selecting a column you want to hide from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the header column hides that column To display the hidden column select the column from the said popup menu again Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 65 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 9 2 Setting Conditions for Measurement Conditions for measurement can be displayed and changed in the Performance Analysis window Select a point where a condition is to be set and then select Set from the popup menu to display the Performance Analysis Properties dialog box Select either from the following five modes as the condition by the Measurement Method option Table 3 3 Conditions for Measurement Measurement Method Measurement Method Option Time Of Specified Range Measurement Start Point To End Point Measurement Start Range To End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Set a condition for measurement according to the mode being selected The parameters to be set depend on the modes The
109. HE USE AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE EMULATOR PRODUCT Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page II of VIII REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS State Law Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which may vary from state to state The Warranty is Void in the Following Cases Renesas shall have no liability or legal responsibility for any problems caused by misuse abuse misapplication neglect improper handling installation repair or modifications of the emulator product without Renesas prior written consent or any problems caused by the user system All Rights Reserved This user s manual and emulator product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by Renesas No part of this user s manual all or part may be reproduced or duplicated in any form in hard copy or machine readable form by any means available without Renesas prior written consent Other Important Things to Keep in Mind 1 Circuitry and other examples described herein are meant merely to indicate the characteristics and performance of Renesas semiconductor products Renesas assumes no responsibility for any intellectual property claims or other problems that may result from applications based on the examples described herein 2 No license is granted b
110. ION Read this manual before using the emulator product Incorrect operation or connection will damage the user system the emulator product and the user program The E6000H emulator is an efficient software and hardware development support tool for application systems using the microcomputer developed by Renesas Technology Corp The E6000H emulator can either be used without a user system for developing and debugging software or connected via a user system interface cable to a user system for debugging user hardware The emulator provides the following features 1 Realtime emulation of the MCU 2 Efficient debugging enabled by variable break functions and a mass storage trace memory 128 kcycles 3 Parallel access with a command execution during emulation for example e Trace data display e Emulation memory display and modification 4 Performance analysis Measurement of subroutine execution time and count for evaluating the execution efficiency of user programs 5 Graphical User Interface by the High performance Embedded Workshop that runs on Windows operating systems High performance Embedded Workshop is a Graphical User Interface intended to ease the development and debugging of applications written in C C programming language and assembly language Its aim is to provide a powerful yet intuitive way of accessing observing and modifying the debugging platform in which the application is running The High performance Em
111. Initiation The emulator displays error messages in the format below if an error occurs at emulator initiation in the dedicated message dialog box when the High performance Embedded Workshop is used Table 6 1 lists error messages at emulator initiation Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 153 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 6 Error Messages Table 6 1 Error Messages at Initiation Error Message Description and Solution There is no configuration file The configuration file that is required to initiate the emulator cannot be found Exit and re install the High performance Embedded Workshop Then re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail The contents of the configuration file are incorrect The configuration file that is required to initiate the emulator is invalid Exit and re install the High performance Embedded Workshop Then re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail Main Board not Support XX XX XX Emulator is switched off or not connected The emulator power is not turned on or the user system interface cable is not connected Exit the High perf
112. OK 11 MAP Control RAM MarGhing asscaccne cabecedadassacseaneecud OK Evaluation Board Access 01 Registers Initial Valge Check ss 0sacaadaeewangeeeaa geeks OK 02 Registers Write Verify sidiiirrrrriiiiidiitis ets eeas OK 03 H UDI IDCODE Cheek 2 s c03 cc cases cease ee epee oe EREE Y OK O4 Firmware BOOT essddd deen ss caweus 3550905 gE SAS Se OS SURG ELS OE ET STS OK 05 Configuration Set oe 2 cen sb aeRSR ae oa GR SR eed edad OK Basic Function OL GOO BREAK egiecetiee SST SSE REDE E ERR SEE Eee RRS OK OAF RESET UO 523 5 E05 wig oi siare AAAA ANEA AA AREE SERA eae esos OK 0I OEE ort Errr Si Si Sinn wo agg We Ree Naar way ey whee ge aria Wg SSNS SSS RNS S OK 04 KEYBREAK 66s bb pos oss sess e 6G 5515 505 SR RFE Bee RR Grace OK 05 BRRCONT iis seep esc csc cess bee Fe SSS FoR BEES BEE DE DRG ers OK 06 Internal ROM Address Decode Test 22000055 OK 07 Internal ROM Marching Teg 2 5cccce ea ea ee ead OK 08 Internal RAM Address Decode Test 220000005 OK 09 Internal RAM Marching Test iss ssss eeeeiiweeeeis caGG SoS OK 10 Emulation RAM Address Decode Test 0002 ee eeee OK 11 Emulation RAM Marching Test cc cesses eee ee eee ay OK U2 MAD Br ak 3 lt saacc So 2S SOO4 SHS ARHOEE oe SSESS EERE SORES ES OK GO to BREAK Time Measurement 01 Counter Test Mode EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling 20ns OK 02 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 03 EMU 12Mh
113. P Sets the current project 24 CHANGE_SESSION cs Changes the current session 25 CLOSE_WORKSPACE CW Close the current workspace 26 CONFIGURE_ CPF Sets the debugging environment for the emulator PLATFORM 27 CUSTOM_DEVICE CDE Customizes the device 28 DEFAULT_OBJECT_ DO Sets the default object program format FORMAT 29 DEVICE_TYPE DE Selects a device type to emulate Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 162 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Appendix B Command Lines Table B 1 High performance Embedded Workshop Commands cont No Command Name Abbreviat Function ion 30 DISASSEMBLE DA Disassembles memory contents 31 EMULATOR_CLOCK ECK Selects the clock rate of the target MCU for the emulator 32 ERASE ER Clears the Command Line window 33 EVALUATE EV Evaluates an expression 34 EXMONITOR_DISPLAY EXMD Displays the content of the expansion monitor 35 EXMONITOR_SET EXMS Selects whether or not to display the items in the expansion monitor 36 EXMONITOR_ EXMSR _ Sets the time to update the expansion monitor during SETRATE emulation or a break 37 FILE_LOAD FL Loads an object program file 38 FILE_SAVE FS Saves memory to a file 39 FILE_UNLOAD FU Unloads a file 40 FILE_VERIFY FV Verifies file contents against memory 41 GENERATE_MAKE_ GM Creates a makefile to be built outside the High FILE performance Embedded Workshop 42 GO GO Exec
114. Page 19 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 1 Pin Arrangement on HS1650EPH60H cont User I F 2 Pin No Signal Name User I F 2 Pin No Signal Name UCN2 173 UCN2 187 MDO 174 188 MD1 175 189 MD2 176 190 177 VSS_85 191 178 192 179 193 VSS_3 180 194 VSS_2 181 VSS_86 195 182 196 EXTAL 183 197 VSS_87 184 198 185 199 186 200 Note Do not connect anything to pins indicated as Otherwise this will damage the emulator or result in a fire hazard Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 20 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 5 Precautions on Connecting the User System When connecting the evaluation chip board to the user system note the following 1 Secure the E6000H station location Place the E6000H station and evaluation chip board so that the trace cable is not bent or twisted as shown below A bent or twisted cable will impose stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the E6000H station is placed in a secure position so that it does not move and impose stress on the user interface while being used 2 Make sure the power supply is off Before connecting the evaluation chip board to the user system check that the emulator and the user system are turned off
115. REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 6 Emulation Monitor 01 RESERVED 02 RESERVED 03 ASBEST e cseeisie se SP See eeee eee waeiiedeeees ys 7 G A Break Function OL Address Condition 5 55555 6 680408 4 ded geavgray s S508 Sue 02 Data Condition 4046504445 65826445 0496000 55888 03 Control Signal Condition ASEDSHH HL LH HL 04 Function Code Condition ASEST3 0 05 RESERVED 06 Control Signal Condition CB22 19 07 Control Signal Condition CB18 16 8 G A Performance Analysis Function 01 Time Measurement 20ns Sampling 9 G A Monitor Function OTs RON cerpas a Je 2h 8 id p55 5S Ha oleae cn te ES 02 NCCDOWN sc005 54 4 55 94d senate e E Stns ees ee 03 NOOLE wekee MEE ENE SSSR ee ea aaa pees DEJ TIMEOUT 26 is ileze Gace n EERIE EESE dobre bb haai 10 G A Parallel RAM Monitor Dir PRAM Clea 24 5 5 55 05 5 e004 6 ee 2 4 4 46 Ge aR S RENN 02 PRAM MONLEOE x 6 45 0 5p le aa TERE ae alee eS ee ESS 11 G A Trace Function Dir Fro Trace etek Sd cede ee eo aoe EG Ore 02 Trace Stop nee nese er See ee ere eRe eee aes 03 Time SEAME seess risas srs 4a dee ED eee e ee 12 Combination 01 B to A Time Measurement FPGA counter 02 B to A Time Measurement G A counter 03 D to C Time Measurement G A counter 13 Parallel Access 01 Internal ROM Parallel Test 02 Internal RAM Para
116. RENESAS Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System User s Manual H8SX E6000H Emulator Publication Date Rev 1 00 August 25 2003 Rev 11 00 January 28 2009 Published by Sales Strategic Planning Div Renesas Technology Corp Edited by Customer Support Department Global Strategic Communication Div Renesas Solutions Corp 2009 Renesas Technology Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan Renesas Technology Corp Sales Strategic Planning Div Nippon Bldg 2 6 2 Ohte machi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan 2CENESAS RENESAS SALES OFFICES http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com en network for the latest and detailed information Renesas Technology America Inc 450 Holger Way San Jose CA 95134 1368 U S A Tel lt 1 gt 408 382 7500 Fax lt 1 gt 408 382 7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel lt 44 gt 1628 585 100 Fax lt 44 gt 1628 585 900 Renesas Technology Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIACenter No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai China 200120 Tel lt 86 gt 21 5877 1818 Fax lt 86 gt 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd 7th Floor North Tower World Finance Centre Harbour City Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel lt 852 gt 2265 6688 Fax lt 852 gt 2377 3473 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co Ltd 10th Floor No 99 Fus
117. Selecting multiple monitoring conditions enables a temporary stop of update hiding and deletion 2x Name Address V monitor2 H OOFFBO80 M monitort H OOFFBO _heap_area Add Edit Lock Refresh Hide Remove Close Figure 3 17 Windows Select Dialog Box Add Adds a new monitoring condition Edit Changes the settings of the selected Monitor window disabled when selecting multiple items Lock Refresh Unlock Refresh Automatically updates or stops updating the display of the selected Monitor window Hide UnHide Displays or hides the selected Monitor window Remove Removes the selected monitoring conditions Close Closes this dialog box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 31 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 6 Looking at Variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program 3 6 1 Watch Window You can view any value in the Watch window a FFB400 ilong 10 R 0 H O000041c6 FFB400 long R 1 H 0000167e FFB404 ilong R 2 H 00002781 FFB408 ilong R 3 H 0000446b FFB40C long R 4 H O000794b FFB410 ilong R 5 H O00015fb FFB414 ilong R 6 H 000059e2 FFB418 long R 7 H O0001icfb FFB41 c ilong R 8 H OO003 54 FFB420 ilong R 9 H OO000ff6 FFB424 ilong i H 000a R2 int Ae watehs watch A watcha A watch
118. There are 15 steps in this test Message Description E6000H H8SX 1650 Emulator Tests V Copyright c 2003 Renesas Technology Corp LGading AKiVeEY wawaeaeeseeeeeeeceeeee ess OK Use PCI Initial tZing dvivert ooienidseeuswews eee OK Searching for interface card OK Checking emulator is connected OK Emulator board information Main board ID H Emulation board ID H Normal started at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Test program start message x x shows the version number Shows that the PC interface board is correctly installed in the host computer Shows that the E6000H emulator is correctly connected to the host computer Shows the ID number of the E6000H emulator Shows the time when the diagnostic program was started up Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 38 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure x k NORMAL TEST Press Q to stop COUNT 0001 1 Main Board Access 01 Registers Initial Value Check 2 2 OK 02 Registers Write Verify 2 666668 aca ssseee EKKE KEDDA OK 03 DPRAM Address Decode Test 2 2 0 2 eee eee eee SKIP Q4 DPRAM Marching Test aicciai saad ee esees cbc Hees ee RES aE SKIP 05 Trace Memory Address Decode Test OK 06 Trace Memory Marching Test 2 22 ee eee eee OK 07 G A Registers Initial Value Check 2 2 0 OK 08 G A Registers Write
119. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http Awww renesas com inquiry 2CENESAS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gra
120. Trace Information in a File Select Save from the popup menu to open the Save As file dialog box which allows the user to save the information displayed in the Trace window as a text file A range can be specified based on the PTR number saving the complete buffer may take several minutes Note that this file cannot be reloaded into the Trace window Note In filtering of trace information the range to be saved cannot be selected All the trace information displayed in the Trace window after filtering will be saved Select a filtering range on the General page in the Trace Filter dialog box if you want to save the selected range For details on the filtering function refer to section 3 8 11 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information 3 8 7 Viewing the Editor Window The Editor window corresponding to the selected trace record can be displayed in the following two ways e Select a trace record and choose View Source from the popup menu e Double click a trace record The Editor or Disassembly window opens and the selected line is marked with a cursor 3 8 8 Trimming the Source Choose Trim Source from the popup menu to remove the white space from the left side of the source When the white space is removed a check mark is shown to the left of the Trim Source menu To restore the white space choose Trim Source while the check mark is shown 3 8 9 Temporarily Stopping Trace Acquisition To tempora
121. U7 PJO to PJ7 PKO to PK7 PKO to PK Compression circuit P40 to P47 P40 to P47 et P50 to P57 AVcc AVss AVref Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 3 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 21 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications Vcc User system interface cable VHCT125 47 kQ P20 P22 to P27 VHC125 CB3Q3306 MCU P20 P22 to P27 SUB MCU Vec User system interface cable VHCT125 47 kQ P21 VHC125 CB3Q3306 CBTS3306 Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 4 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 22 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications Vcc User system interface cable VHCT125 47 KQ PA1 to PA3 PDO to PD7 PA1 to PA3 PDO to PD7 VHC125 CBTS3306 SUB MCU PA1 to PA3 PDO to PD7 Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 5 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 23 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 Support of the Target MCU 3 4 1 Memory Space The architecture of the MCU allows for a 16 Mbyte memory space 1 On Chip I O Area If an attempt is made to access the on chip I O area the on chip I O area in the MCU installed in the emulator is accessed To break user program execution when the on chip I O area is written to or accessed use the hardware break or internal break 2 On Chip ROM RAM Area If an attempt is made to access the o
122. UN or break High level output at RUNSTEP output Figure 2 5 External Probe Connector Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 22 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 7 Selecting the Clock This emulator supports three types of clock for the MCUs listed in table 2 2 a crystal oscillator attached on the evaluation chip board external clock input from the user system and the emulator internal clock The clock is specified with the Configuration Properties dialog box Table 2 2 Maximum Operating Frequency of the System Clock MCU Maximum Operating Frequency of the Frequency Range of the Crystal System Clock p Oscillator H8SX 1650 35 MHz 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1657 H8SX 1651 50 MHz H8SX 1653 H8SX 1654 H8SX 1663 H8SX 1664 H8SX 1642 H8SX 1644 H8SX 1648 H8SX 1632 H8SX 1634 H8SX 1638 H8SX 1663R H8SX 1664R H8SX 1668R H8SX 1653R H8SX 1654R H8SX 1658R H8SX 1650C Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 23 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Table 2 3 CLOCK Command MCU Mode Clock CLOCK Command H8SX 1653 MD_CLK_O 12 Emulator clock 12 MHz 16 Emulator clock 16 MHz H 1654 69X165 Target External clock 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1663 Xtal Crystal oscillator 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1664 c MD_CLK_1 16 Emulator clock 16 MHz H8SX 1663R Target External clock 8 to 18 MH
123. Verify iis esses ce See ee ee eee ace atetes OK 2 Emulation Board Access 01 Registers Initial Value Check 0 OK 02 Registers Write VerIEy oic sisci5 3 ee nae idad gyeh pares aaa E OK 3 Evaluation Board Access 01 Registers Initial Value Check OK 02 REGIBESrS WEILEG VEELEY oono i iiaee EEEE ED EEEEERRES OK 03 UDI IDEME Cheek diroris rP PERENNER ARAA AAAA OK 04 Firmware DOI sss6 s4 006e ees amp Seo HSH AIRES Re a OK 05 Configuration Set ss 4664546 440i bbb bee elsee ede Gane ae ae OK 4 Basic Function Diy GO bO BREAK ooo dee ees dee eags eka d EET sce LERRSE annn OK 02 RESET GO lt 5 5 ncn coneeeanam mae eae eeee be eee aes bles OK 03 STEP cs 5 5 be SESS SEER SEES SEES ere ce ce eS RSE SS ESE See eS OK 04 KEYBREAK Siasii bo peau wens a eae ee oe sata eerie ls AAA OK O05 BRKCONT cnc n eee Rae Reo ee Meme eed de bdbe eee eee ees aaah ewe OK 06 Internal ROM Address Decode Test 2 22000 OK 07 Internal ROM Marching Test 22 e eee eee eee OK 08 Internal RAM Address Decode Test 020e2 ee eeee OK 09 Internal RAM Marching Test 02 2 ee eee eee OK 10 RESERVED 11 RESERVED Tar MAP o 2 ce eo ne eer OK 5 GO to BREAK Time Measurement 01 Counter Test Mode EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling 20ns OK 02 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling 2005 OK 03 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Samplin
124. View menu or click the View Memory toolbar button 2 to open the Format dialog box Enter _ main in the Begin edit box and f in the End edit box respectively and select Byte in the Format combo box Display Address _main al Scroll Start Address foooooca Scroll End Address FFFFFFF al A Figure 4 14 Format Dialog Box e Click the OK button The Memory window showing the selected area of memory is displayed Address Register F ASCII 0001024 main 55 02 40 FC 01 10 6D F2 1A 80 SE OO 20 00 OF 83 U oe 0001034 219 23 5E 00 11 7A Ob 01 LE FL 4 102 47 BL 70 o Ma Bee 0001044 6B Al OO FF B4 00 OB 52 79 22 OO OA 4D E4 7A 02 Ry M z oo00105a OO FF B4 00 OF Al OF BO SE 00 20 46 OF Al OF BO 0001064 SE on 20 c6 O1 08 O2 O3 O1 O8 12 13 O1 0e 22 23 0001074 01i 08 32 33 01 08 c2 c3 00 10 00 10 0i O08 c2 c3 0001084 00 14 OO 14 01 08 c2 C3 00 18 OO 18 01 08 c2 c3 0001094 00 ic OO ic O1 08 c2 c3 00 20 OO 20 D1 O08 c2 c3 0001044 00 24 00 24 OF BO SE OO 11 70 54 13 54 70 01 20 0001054 6D F4 7A OO OO OO 14 48 7A 01 00 OO 14 50 40 12 00010CA loop1 01 00 6D 04 01 OO 6D OS 40 04 01 7D 84 OO IF D4 0001004 45 F8 iF 90 45 EA 7A OO 00 00 14 3 7A 01 00 00 00010EA4 14 48 40 1 01 00 6D 05 01 OO 6D 04 01 OO 6D 06 00010FA 1A D4 47 OC 64 44 47 02 OB Sc 7B 94 1B SC 46 FA 0001104 next_loop3 1F 90 45 EO 54 26 O1 10 6D F2 OF 83 46 02 OF 9B i Figure 4 15 Memory Wi
125. When the column header is clicked data are sorted in alphabetic or numeric ascending descending order Double clicking the Function Variable or Address column displays the source program of the address in the line Right clicking on the mouse within the window displays a popup menu For details on this popup menu refer to section 3 10 5 Tree Sheet Note For notes on the profiling function refer to section 5 9 Profiling Function Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 74 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 10 5 Tree Sheet l5ix El PowerON_Reset 00000400 H 00000024 H 00000000 1 442 __INITSCT 00001088 H o0000000 H o0000000 1 88074 _srand 00001148 H O000000E H o0000000 1 135 __CALL_INIT 0000114 H 0000001E xH O0000000 1 268 El main 00001024 H 00000004 xH O0000000 1 63 El tutorial 0000102E H o00000088 H o0000000 1 3151 Sample Sample 00002000 H 00000046 H OOo000000 1 603 Sample change long OO00020c6 H 00000054 H 0O0000000 1 4695 Sample sort long 00002046 H 00000080 xH o0000000 1 15632 _rand 00001174A H 0000002E H O0000000 10 4120 GPT ist tree Figure 3 44 Profile Window Tree Sheet This window displays the relation of function calls in a tree structure Displayed contents are the address size stack size and number of function calls and execution cycles The stack size and number of function calls are values when the function is called The T
126. acquisition conditions 96 TRACE_ACQUISITION TAC Deletes trace acquisition parameters _CLEAR 97 TRACE_BINARY_ TBC Compares a trace binary file with the current trace COMPARE information 98 TRACE_BINARY_SAVE TBV Outputs trace information into a binary file 99 TRACE_FILTER TF Filters trace information 100 TRACE_SAVE TV Outputs trace information into a file 101 TRACE_STATISTIC TST Analyzes statistic information 102 UPDATE_ALL_ UD Updates dependencies of the current project DEPENDENCIES 103 USER_SIGNALS US Enables or disables the user signal information Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 164 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Appendix B Command Lines Table B 1 High performance Embedded Workshop Commands cont No Command Name Abbreviation Function 104 WATCH_ADD WA Adds a watch item 105 WATCH_AUTO_UPDATE WU Selects or cancels automatic update of watch items 106 WATCH_DELETE WD Deletes a watch item 107 WATCH_DISPLAY wi Displays the contents of the Watch window 108 WATCH_EDIT WE Edits the value of a watch item 109 WATCH_EXPAND WX Expands or collapses a watch item 110 WATCH_RADIX WR Changes the radix of a watch item to be displayed 111 WATCH_SAVE WS Saves the contents of the Watch window to a file For the syntax of each command refer to the online help Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 165 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Appendix B Command Lines Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 166 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100
127. address value or the start of the instruction address range Enter the end address of the instruction address range Set a data condition Detects no data when this box is checked Detects the specified data Enter a single data value Specify a data range Enter a single data value or the minimum value of the data range Enter the maximum value of the data range Set an address condition Detects no address when this box is checked Detects the specified address Enter a single address value Specify an address range Enter a single address value or the start of the address range Enter a single address or the end of the address range Select the type of access cycles Detects no read write condition when this box is checked Detects the specified read write condition RD Detects read cycles WR Detects write cycles Select the area being accessed Detects no area condition when this box is checked Detects the specified area condition INROM Detects accesses to the ROM area INRAM Detects accesses to the RAM area I O Detects accesses to the I O area EXT 32 Detects accesses to the 32 bit EXT external memory Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 58 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging Status Don t care Setting Probes Don t care Setting IRQ Don t care Setting Timestamp Don t care Setting Point Range
128. age the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the right side of the E6000H station s front panel is not lit Remove the AC power cable of the E6000H station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet The emulator is connected to the user system via the user system interface cable 2 2 2 Connecting the User System Interface Cable A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system and check pin numbers on the connectors and IC socket before connecting or disconnecting the USER SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE Connection with the power on or incorrect connection will damage the emulator user system interface cable and user system and result in a FIRE HAZARD For details on the method of connecting the user system interface cable refer to the descriptions of the user system interface cables for individual H8SX 1527 E6000H series products Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 10 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 3 Precautions on Connecting the User System When connecting the emulator to the user system note the following 1 Secure the E6000H station location Place the E6000H station and the E6000H s front end unit so that the trace cable is not bent or twisted as shown below A bent or twisted cable will impose
129. al line E6000H station Evaluation i User system Power supply 7 Signal ground Frame ground Ground Figure 2 4 Connecting the System Ground AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 15 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use The user system must be connected to an appropriate ground so as to minimize noise and the adverse effects of ground loops When connecting the emulator s front end unit and the user system confirm that the ground pins of the front end unit are firmly connected to the user system s ground Emulator power User system supply cable power supply cable Outlet Ground 100 V to 240 V AC power Figure 2 5 Connecting the Frame Ground 2 2 7 PC Interface Board Specifications For details on the PC interface board LAN adapter or USB adapter refer to their description notes Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 16 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 1 Environmental Conditions Observe the conditions listed in table 3 1 when using the emulator The following environmental cond
130. allow the execution of the user program at the operating frequency of the user system even when the user system is not connected to the emulator Enlarged view Crystal oscillator Crystal oscillator terminals Evaluation chip board Figure 2 6 Installing the Crystal Oscillator External Clock Follow the procedure listed below to select the external clock Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Check that the power LED is not lit 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the user system and supply a clock signal through the EXTAL pin from the user system 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power The external clock source will then be automatically specified Emulator Internal Clock Specify the corresponding internal clock to the device from the Configuration dialog box in figure 2 3 Reference When the emulator system program is initiated the emulator automatically selects the MCU clock source according to the following priority 1 User system s clock when an external clock is supplied from the user system 2 Crystal oscillator if one is mounted on the evaluation chip board 3 Emulator internal clock Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 25 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 8 Connecting the System Ground CAUTION Separate the frame ground from the signal ground at the user system When the frame ground is conne
131. alue Detects the specified address Enter an address value Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 54 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging R W Don t care Setting Area Don t care Setting Status Don t care Setting Probes Don t care Setting IRQ Don t care Setting Timestamp Don t care Select the type of access cycles Detects no read write condition when this box is checked Detects the specified read write condition RD Read cycle WR Write cycle Select the area being accessed Detects no area condition when this box is checked Detects the specified area condition INROM ROM INRAM RAM 1 0 1 0 EXT 32 32 bit EXT external memory EXT 16 16 bit EXT external memory EXT 8 8 bit EXT external memory EMU 32 32 bit EMU emulation memory EMU 16 16 bit EMU emulation memory EMU 8 8 bit EMU emulation memory Select the status of a bus Detects no bus condition when this box is checked Detects the specified bus condition PROG Prefetch cycle DATA CPU data access cycle DMAC DMAC cycle DTC DTC operation STACK Stack cycle Select the status of probe signals Detects no probe signal condition when this box is checked Detects the specified probe signal condition Don t care Detects no selected probe condition High The status of the probe signal is high Low The statu
132. ample RB 0001050 for 2 i lt 10 i ji Es x Eae type 000103 j rand 0001044 if j lt O BR FFB400 long 10 0001046 ae 8 R 0 H OOOOOff6 FFB400 long 0001048 ali j R 1 H 000015fb FFB404 long R 2 H O000167e FFB408 long 0001058 e p_sam gt sort a R 3 H OOOO01cfh FFB40C long 0001066 gt p_sam gt change a R 4 H 00002781 FFB410 long amines p_sam gt s0 a 0 R 5 H 00003f54 FFB414 long 0001072 p_sam gt s1 a 1 R 6 H 000041c6 FFB418 long 0001076 p_sam gt s2 a 2 R 7 H 0000446b FFB41C long e e n 8 H 000059e2 FFB420 long e p_sam gt s a 0001086 p_sam gt s5 a 5 R 9 H 0000794b FFB424 long 000108e p_sam gt s6 a 6 i H b400 R2 int 0001096 p_sam gt s7 a 7 000109e p_Sam gt s8 a 8 00010a6 p_sam gt s9 a 9 00010ae delete p_sam Aeh Watchi A watchz A Watch3 A watcha 7 Figure 4 25 High performance Embedded Workshop Window Step Out The data of variable a displayed in the Watch window is sorted in the ascending order Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 102 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 13 3 Executing the Step Over Command The Step Over executes a function call in a single step and stops at the next statement of the main program e To step through all statements in the change function in a single step select Step Over fro
133. an 28 2009 Page 70 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 5 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Performance An Measurement Method PA1 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement gt Range Name PA1 Range Call Range Start Address H o0000000 I Start Address H o0000000 f End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 TASK D gt Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Others Address Control Mode PC TASK Selection Static TASK Gelection2 Static Time Measurement Unit 20ns TASK Selection3 Static oK Figure 3 42 Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Call Range The range for the Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement As the call range specify the start and end addresses of the selected subroutine Start Address Start address End Address End address Measures the number of times the range specified as the call range is called from the range specified by the start and end addresses The execution time in the specified range can be measured with Time Of Specified Range Measurement mode As the call range specify the start and end addresses of the selected subroutine Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 71 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Sect
134. and propagation delays The user system interface circuits connected to the user system are shown in figure 3 2 The delay time is generated on the timing of the RES and _NMI signals when they are input to the MCU from the user system as shown in table 3 2 because this connection for those signals is via logic circuit on the emulator s front end unit Table 3 2 Delay Time for Signal Connected via the Emulator s Front end Unit Signal Name Delay Time ns _RES 21 _NMI 21 MCU User system interface cable MD control Monitor circuit circuit VHC244 MDO 47 KQ MD1 VHC244 EPM7256 LPT16244 VHC244 RES NMI Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 1 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 19 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU User system interface cable Voltage follower circuit Vcc j lt VW Vcc Vss Vss to NC Vc 47 KQ EMLE VHC244 EPM7256 VHC244 LPT244 47 kQ EXTAL NC XTAL Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 2 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 20 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications Vec MCU User system VHCT125 47 ka interface cable P10 to P17 P10 to P17 P30 to P37 P30 to P37 P60 to P67 P60 to P67 PAO PA4 to PA7 PAO PA4 to PA7 vis PBO to PB2 PBO to PB2 PHO to PH7 PHO to PH7 PIO to PI7 PIO to PI7 PJO to P
135. ange Enter the maximum value of the time stamp range Set filtering conditions and then press the OK button This starts filtering according to the conditions Clicking the Cancel button closes the Trace Filter dialog box which holds the settings at the time when the dialog box was opened In filtering only the trace information that satisfies one or more filtering conditions set in the above pages will be displayed in the Trace window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 59 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging Filtering conditions can be changed several times to analyze data because the content of the trace buffer is not changed by filtering 3 8 12 Calculating the Difference in Time Stamping Select Timestamp Difference from the popup menu to calculate the time difference between the two points selected by the result of tracing in acquisition of time stamp information r Select 2 line First PTR 32764 Second PTR fo Timestamp difference information Timestamp Difference 0000h 000min 000s 003ms 897us 875ns Get Difference Clear u x Select 2 line First PTR Second PTR Timestamp Difference Get Difference Clear OK Figure 3 32 Timestamp Difference Dialog Box Select trace records to calculate the time stamp difference Specifies the first pointer to measure the difference The pointer of the line selected on the T
136. annels If no setting has been made for a channel only the channel number is displayed here When a channel is used for the sequential break function S is displayed next to the channel number Clicking this button opens the On Chip Break Channel n dialog box n channel number which allows the user to set a break condition for a selected channel Clears the settings made for the selected channel Clears the settings made for all of the channels The user can set more complex break conditions in the On Chip Break Channel n dialog box by a combination of conditions provided on pages Address Data Bus Area Count and Action On Chip Break Channel 1 Figure 3 23 On Chip Break Channel n Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 38 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging Address Data Bus Are Count Action Don t Care Address Use mask Sets address bus conditions Selects no address bus condition Sets an address bus value Sets mask conditions Set the mask bits if Use mask is selected Masked bits satisfy this break condition regardless of their values Sets data bus conditions Don t Care Value Use mask Access Size Access type Bus State Read Write Selects no data bus condition Sets a data bus value Sets mask conditions Set the mask bits if Use mask is selected Masked bits satisfy
137. ard 3 Evaluation Board Access Register test in the E6000H evaluation chip board 4 Basic Function Test of the basic functions GO to BREAK Time Measurement Test of the execution time measurement function 6 Emulation Monitor Test of the emulation monitor G A Break Function Test of the G A break function G A Performance Analysis Function Test of the G A performance measurement function 9 G A Monitor Function Test of the G A monitoring function 10 G A Parallel RAM Monitor Test of the G A parallel RAM monitoring function 11 G A Trace Function Test of the G A trace function 12 Combination Test of several functions in combination 13 Parallel Access Test of the parallel access function Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 60 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 3 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program Insert the CD R HS 1650EPH60SR supplied with the emulator into the CD ROM drive of the host computer use the command prompt to change the current directory to lt Drive gt Diag 1650 and enter the command below that corresponds to the PC interface board used to initiate the diagnostic program 1 PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EIC02H gt TM1650 PCI Enter 2 PC card interface HS6000EIP01H or HS6000EIP02H gt TM1650 PCCD Enter 3 LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H gt TM1650 ELN Enter 4 USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000
138. ator to a host computer as a network Network E6000H emulator LAN adapter L AS Host computer PC interface cable Figure 1 6 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 6 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 3 USB Adapter Figure 1 7 shows the configuration of a system in which the USB adapter is used A USB adapter can be used to connect the emulator to a host computer with the USB interface E6000H emulator f S pene Host computer USB cable PC interface cable Figure 1 7 System Configuration Using a USB Adapter Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 7 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 8 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 Description on Emulator Usage This section describes the preparation before emulator usage Figure 2 1 is a flowchart on preparation before use of the emulator CAUTION Read this section and understand its contents before preparation Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Connect the emulator Described in this section I Set up the emulator on each OS See the E6000H emulator setup guide Start debugging See the Debugger Part Figure 2 1 Emulator
139. ay and modification of memory contents execution and step execution While emulation is being halted break the input of the RES or NMI signal to the MCU is not possible The input of the RES NMI STBY BREQ or WAIT signal during execution or step execution can be disabled by a setting in the Configuration dialog box 3 4 5 Watchdog Timer WDT When emulation is suspended i e by a break counting up by the WDT timer counter TCNT is also suspended Counting resumes when emulation is resumed user mode During break mode a prescaler which supplies a clock to TCNT operates continuously Since the prescaler might be in different phases before and after emulation goes through a period in the break mode a break can change the period before the WDT overflows by 1 cycle of the prescaler s clock 3 4 6 A D Converter As well as analog input pins the A D converter has AVcc AVss Avref and ADTRG pins As the A D converter operates with an independent power supply connect AVcc the power supply pin to the A D power supply on the user system Notes 1 When the A D converter is not in use connect AVcc to Vcc 2 As the user system interface cable wiring on the printed circuit board and protective circuits are connected between the user system and the evaluation chip on the evaluation chip board the precision of conversion is lower than that of the H8SX 1600 series MCU Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 54 of 68 REJ10J1130
140. bar button 2 to display the Register window Name Value Radix ERO o0000000 Hex ER1 oooooooo Hex ERZ ooo00000 Hex ER3 oo000000 Hex ER4 oo000000 Hex ERS oo000000 Hex ER6 oo000000 Hex ER 00000010 Hex PC oo000000 Hex CCR 10000000 i0 lt Bin EXR DITI s Lit Bin VBR oooooooo Hex SBR FFFFFFOO Hex MACH 00000000 Hex MACL 00000000 Hex Figure 4 7 Register Window e To change the value of the program counter PC double click on the PC value area in the Register window with the mouse The following dialog box is then displayed and the value can be changed Set the program counter to H 00000400 in this tutorial program and click the OK button axl Value ooooosoo Radix Hex 7 Set As whole Register xl pes Figure 4 8 Register Dialog Box PC Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 89 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 7 Executing the Program Execute the program as described in the following e To execute the program select Go from the Debug menu or click the Go button on the toolbar E Figure 4 9 Go Button While the program is executed the current address bus value and the operating state of the MCU are displayed on the status bar The program will be executed up to the software breakpoint that has been set and an arrow will appear on the S W Breakpoints column in the Editor window to show the position where the program has
141. bbreviation Function 69 REFRESH RF Updates windows related to memory 70 REGISTER_DISPLAY RD Displays CPU register values 71 REGISTER_SET RS Sets CPU register contents 72 REMOVE_FILE REM Deletes the specified file from the current project 73 RESET RE Resets CPU 74 RTOS RT Sets debugging of RTOS tasks 75 SAVE_SESSION SE Saves the current session 76 SLEEP Delays command execution 77 STEP ST Steps program by instructions or source lines 78 STEP_MODE SM Sets the step mode 79 STEP_OUT SP Steps out of the current function 80 STEP_OVER SO Steps program not stepping into functions 81 STEP_RATE SR Sets or displays rate of stepping 82 SUBMIT SU Executes a command file 83 SYMBOL_ADD SA Defines a symbol 84 SYMBOL_CLEAR SC Deletes a symbol 85 SYMBOL_LOAD SL Loads a symbol information file 86 SYMBOL_SAVE SS Saves a symbol information file 87 SYMBOL_VIEW SV Displays symbols 88 STATUS STS The content of the Platform sheet in the Status window is displayed 89 SAVE_WORKSPACE SW Saves the current workspace 90 TCL Enables or disables the TCL 91 TIMER TI Sets or displays the timer resolution 92 TOOL_INFORMATION TO Outputs information on the currently registered tool to a file 93 TRACE TR Displays trace information 94 TRACE_ACQUISITION TA Sets or displays trace acquisition parameters 95 TRACE_ACQUISITIONn TAn Sets PtoP point and each channel for trace
142. bedded Workshop is a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at microcontrollers The main features are e A configurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options via an easy to use interface e An integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability e A configurable environment to run your own tools e An integrated debugger which allows you to build and debug in the same application e Version control support The High performance Embedded Workshop has been designed with two key aims firstly to provide you the user with a set of powerful development tools and secondly to unify and present them in a way that is easy to use Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page of X ztENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 About This Manual This manual is comprised of two parts Hardware Part and Debugger Part Hardware Part Preparation before use hardware specifications and troubleshooting procedure Debugger Part A peculiar debugging function to the emulator tutorial emulator software specification and notes This manual describes the debugging function for H8SX E6000H Emulator debugger that used with the High performance Embedded Workshop For detailed information on the basic look and feel of the High performance Embedded Workshop and customizing the High performance Embedded Workshop environment and the build and the debugging functions common to t
143. been changed are displayed in gray Appear A value is only displayed after changed Foreground Sets the color used for display available when Change has been selected Background Sets the background color available when Change has been selected Mayfly A check in this box selects restoration of the color of those data which have not been updated in a specified interval to the color selected in the Background option The specified interval is the interval for monitor acquisition available when Change Gray or Appear has been selected Detail Sets the items specific to the emulator History Displays the previous settings Notes 1 In this emulator odd addressees cannot be specified as the start addresses for monitoring 2 Selection of the foreground or background color may not be available depending on the operating system in use After setting clicking the OK button displays the Monitor window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 28 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging or monitor OOFFB400 g g fis z Exe eson x Address 0 1 2 ae H Mera E ats A anh Gree ce E aa nm sted Eaa Value OOFFB400 00 OO 79 4B OO OO 59 2 00 OO 44 6B OO OO 41 C6 yK Y Dk A 00FF8410 00 00 3F 54 O00 00 27 82 OO 00 ic FB OO OO 16 7H 2T sca Figure 3 15 Monitor Window During user program execution the display is updated according to the setting value of the
144. but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers
145. butor RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 41 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Repair Request Sheet To Distributor Your company name Person in charge Tel Item Symptom 1 Date and time when the malfunction occurred Month Day Year at system initiation in system operation Circle either item in the braces 2 Frequency of generation of the malfunction times in day s week s or month s Enter the appropriate numbers in the parentheses and circle one of the three items in the braces 3 System configuration when the malfunction occurred 1 Enter the system configuration in use when the malfunction occurred e E6000H emulator HS1527KEPH60H or HS1527REPH60H Serial No Revision The above items are written on the label for product management at the bottom of the emulator unit the serial no is the four digit number and the revision is the string of letters following the number e Host interface PCI interface board HS6000EIC01H or HS6000EIC02H PC card interface HS6000EIP01H LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H Circle either item in the braces Serial No Revision These are impressed on the circuit board e Provided CD R HS1650EPH60SR Version V Shown as V x xxrx on the CD R x numeral e Host computer in use Manufacturer Type number OS Windows 98SE Windows
146. cal information analysis Closes this dialog box All the results displayed in the Result list will be cleared Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 61 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging This dialog box allows the user to analyze statistical information concerning the trace information Set the target of analysis in Item and the input value or character string by Start and End Click the Result button after setting a condition by pressing the New or Add button to analyze the statistical information and display its result in the Result list Note In this emulator only PTR can be set as a range Each of other items must be specified as a character string In analysis of statistical information character strings are compared with those displayed in the Trace window Only those that completely match are counted Note however that this test is not case sensitive The number of blanks will not be cared either 3 8 14 Extracting Function Calls from the Acquired Trace Information To extract function calls from the acquired trace information select Function Call from the popup menu The Function Call Display dialog box will be displayed Function Call Display Setting Enable to display trace information with function call only C Disable OK Cancel Figure 3 34 Function Call Display Dialog Box Setting Selects whether or not to extract function calls
147. cations the LAN adapter and the USB adapter refer to the relevant descriptive documents USB cable USB adapter option option i m PC PC interface PC interface cable cable option option le Network LAN adapter option PC interface cable option PC nterface cable option __ PC interface board option E6000H station a 6000H s front end unit Figure 1 1 Emulator Hardware Components Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 2 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 2 1 E6000H Station Components A Part of Photos may be Different from Real Appearances The names of the components on the front rear panel of the E6000H station are listed below Front Panel ERO00H TEN AS Figure 1 2 E6000H Station Front Panel a POWER lamp Is lit up while the E6000H station is supplied with power b RUN lamp Is lit up while the user program is running Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 3 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview Rear Panel a b Figure 1 3 E6000H Station Rear Panel a Power switch Turning this switch to I input supplies power to the emulator E6000H station and the E6000H s front end unit b AC power connector For an AC 100 V to 240 V power supply c PC interface cable connector For the PC interface cable that connects the host computer to the E6000H station A PC interface board PC card int
148. ce Information in a File 3 8 7 Viewing the Editor Window 3 8 8 Trimming the Source 3 8 9 Temporarily Stopping Trace Acquisition 3 8 10 Restarting Trace Acquisition 3 8 11 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information 3 8 12 Calculating the Difference in Time Stamping 3 8 13 Analyzing Statistical Information 3 8 14 Extracting Function Calls from the Acquired Trace Information Analyzing Performance 3 9 1 Opening the Performance Analysis Window 3 9 2 Setting Conditions for Measurement 3 9 3 Starting Performance Data Acquisition 3 9 4 Deleting a Measurement Condition 3 9 5 Deleting All Measurement Conditions Profiling Function 3 10 1 Enabling the Profile 3 10 2 Specifying Measuring Mode 3 10 3 Executing the Program and Checking the Results 3 10 4 List Sheet 3 10 5 Tree Sheet Profile Chart Window RTOS Extension Function 3 12 1 RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties Dialog Box 3 12 2 Task Step Functions 3 12 3 Functions Made Available by TASK Selection 3 12 4 Performance Measurement Conditions for Measurement 3 12 5 Event Point On Emulator Breakpoint Seton lt TUtOriallscirecddeccseucscndescel iechucnahvcds iran e aie seas EEE EE ITTA tvaveceutleieceusves 83 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 Introduction Running the High performance Embedded Workshop Connecting the Emulator 4 3 1 Selecting a Session
149. cess Word data is read and written in a single bus cycle Word data is only valid as the size of an access When a specified address is not a multiple of two 2n several cycles will be generated as shown in tables 5 4 and 5 5 Set address and data conditions according to these tables Note that word data is only valid as the size of an access Byte access Byte data is read and written in a single bus cycle A data condition is only valid for a byte access when specified as byte Any address condition whether an even or odd address is valid Use the mask function so that no invalid data of a 32 bit data bus will be applied as a condition to search data Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 145 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product Table 5 4 User Bus and Break Setting for an Output of Data Big Endian
150. ch cases specify the following directory instead High performance Embedded Workshop installation destination directory Tools Renesas DebugComp Platform E6000H 1650 Tutorial Then select the file indicated below 21x Look in Tutorial amp ex Fae Debug Source File name Tutorial hws Files of type HE W Workspaces hws M Cancel 4 Figure 4 1 Open Workspace Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 84 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 3 Connecting the Emulator 4 3 1 Selecting a Session The selectable session depends on the emulator Select the session suitable for the emulator in use Table 4 1 Selectable Sessions Emulator Session HS1527KEPH60H sessionh8sx_1527_e6000h_emulator HS1527REPH60H sessionh8sx_1527r_e6000h_emulator HS1544EPH60H sessionh8sx_1544_e6000h_emulator HS1650EPH60H sessionh8sx_1650_e6000h_emulator HS1650EPH60H HS1653ECN61H sessionh8sx_1653_e6000h_emulator HS1650EPH60H HS1664ECH61H sessionh8sx_1663_e6000h_emulator HS1650EPH60H HS1638ECN61H sessionh8sx_1638_e6000h_emulator HS1650EPH60H HS1648ECH61H sessionh8sx_1648_e6000h_emulator HS1650EPH60H HS1658RECN61H sessionh8sx_1658_e6000h_emulator HS1650EPH60H HS1668RECH61H sessionh8sx_1668_e6000h_emulator sessionhfsx_1527_e6000t At a a sessior e6000h er sessionh8sx_1650_e6000h_e Figure 4 2 Selecting a Session 4 3 2 Con
151. cle which will not be executed by the branching e Channel 1 is not available for performance analysis when the Point to Point trace mode is selected e The resolution for the performance analysis function can be set in Timer Resolution of the Configuration Properties dialog box If the clock counter value is set as the resolution the value shown in RUN TIME and MAX MIN TIME will be that of the clock counter displayed in hexadecimal 5 10 Profiling Function e If there is no stack information file extension is sni that is output from the optimizing linkage editor only the functions that have been executed during the profiling data measurement are displayed For details of the stack information file refer to the manual of the optimizing linkage editor e The stack size differs from the actual value It should be used as a reference value during a function call If there is no stack information file extension is sni that is output from the optimizing linkage editor the stack size is not displayed e While the profiling function is used software break and on emulator break which are event functions are not available e While the profiling function is used the parallel access function during user program execution is not available e Since the profiling function internally breaks user program execution the program is not executed in realtime The measured value includes an error Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 14
152. cquired profile information file e Find Displays the Find Text dialog box to find a character string in the Function column Search is started by inputting a character string to be found in the edit box and clicking Find Next or pressing the Enter key e Clear Data Clears the number of times functions are called and profile data Data in the Profile window s List sheet and the Profile Chart window are also cleared e Output Profile Information Files Displays the Save Profile Information Files dialog box Profiling results are saved in a profile information file pro extension The optimizing linkage editor optimizes user programs according to the profile information in this file For details of the optimization using the profile information refer to the manual of the optimizing linkage editor Note If profile information has been acquired by selecting the Not trace the function call menu the program cannot be optimized by the optimizing linkage editor e Output Text File Displays the Save Text of Profile Data dialog box Displayed contents are saved in a text file e Setting This menu has the following submenus the menus available only in the List sheet are also included 1 Show Functions Variables Displays both functions and global variables in the Function Variable column 2 Show Functions Displays only functions in the Function Variable column 3 Show Variables Displays only global
153. cribe the error occurrence in detail There is no effective clock source A valid clock source cannot be found Connect a valid clock source This mode can not specify The state of mode pins for the target board is incorrect Initiation is only possible in mode 4 Set the mode pins correctly Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 154 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 6 Error Messages Table 6 1 Error Messages at Initiation cont Error Message Description and Solution Can t find firmware file Firmware open Error Firmware Download Error Firmware Name Error There is an error in the file that is required at emulator initiation Exit the High performance Embedded Workshop re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail Failed to receive a firmware initialization command Initiation of the emulator firmware has failed Exit the High performance Embedded Workshop re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail Target system is Vcc down The value of Vcc is lower than the specified threshold value 6 1 2 Error Messages during Emulation The emulator
154. cted to the signal ground and the emulator is then connected to the user system the emulator will malfunction The emulator s signal ground is connected to the user system s signal ground via the evaluation chip board In the E6000H station the signal ground and frame ground are connected figure 2 7 At the user system connect the frame ground only do not connect the signal ground to the frame ground If it is difficult to separate the frame ground from the signal ground in the user system ground the frame to the same outlet as the 100 V to 240 V AC power supply of the emulator station figure 2 8 so that the ground potentials become even Signal line E6000H station Evaluation chip board User system Signal ground Y Frame ground Ground Figure 2 7 Connecting the System Ground AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 26 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use The user system must be connected to an appropriate ground so as to minimize noise and the adverse effects of ground loops When connecting the evaluation chip board and the user system confirm that the ground p
155. d Range o 0 0 o 0 o 0 o Measurement Start Point To End Point o 0 o o 0 o 0 o Measurement Start Range To End o 0 0 0 Range Measurement Access Count Of o 0 0 0 Specified Range Measurement Called Count Of o 0 O 0 Specified Range Measurement Note O Available Not available Note Only one point is used in Time Of Specified Range Measurement and Start Point To End Point Measurement while two sequential points are used in Start Range To End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement and Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement The conditions that have been set will be canceled when switching these modes of different types Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 64 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 9 1 Opening the Performance Analysis Window Choose View gt Performance gt Performance Analysis or click the PA toolbar button amp to open the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box Performance Analysis E6000H Performance Analysis Figure 3 35 Select Performance Analysis Type Dialog Box Select E6000H Performance Analysis and then click the OK button to open the Performance Analysis window E 10 x ag No Nawe Condition 1 PAL Range H 00002046 H 000020c4 14 h a 8 0 00h OOmin 00s 00ims 303us 820ns MAX MIN TIME O 10 20 a0 1
156. der certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas
157. display in the Monitor Specified eight points or up to 256 bytes of window and in the Watch window when the the areas that the user program is allowed to monitor function is used access Parallel access Windows that display the memory contents All areas that the user program is allowed to function other than the Monitor window access Tooltip watch and instant watch Command to display or modify the contents of memory 5 4 2 Monitor Function e Up to eight points up to 32 bytes per point can be specified for the monitor function e The monitor function is implemented by eight 32 byte hardware channels The address range specified for one channel must be aligned to a 32 byte boundary two channels should be used to specify a range across a 32 byte boundary Accordingly when multiple ranges are specified across 32 byte boundaries the total specifiable size is less than 256 bytes e When monitor function conditions are set or modified during user program execution the program is not executed in realtime e When Format is modified during user program execution the program is not executed in realtime Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 142 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 4 3 Parallel Access Function The parallel access function is implemented by the DTC channels specialized for the debugger which are not user resources However because the DTC channe
158. dra gee eeede SKIP 06 Control Signal Conditions CBI2 19 22c ccwawaiciieigigng cee eee sede gad OK 07 iControl Signal Condition CBI8 16 66 secs eesasaaaaneee ce aeae es OK G A Performance Analysis Function 01 Time Measurement 20ns Sampling 0 e eee eee eee eee ee OK 02 Task Time Measurement 20ns Sampling 2 008 OK G A Monitor Function CUTE SIRI EREKE PEIR DNAREN AAAA wy By ai ows area aril A KAA AA A RRE E AANA OK OD VEON kE REEDE ERARECO AWAARA EREE E RAE A SKIP 037 NOCE cadde idhini a AA E a r a S 3 3 8anere OK OSF TINET a sa 9d de gray arad a a chog EER EE E AEE OK G A Parallel RAM Monitor 01 PRAM CLOI oorarts an EEEE aHROSORERESSES STEER TES ORES CRRA RRR ERE OK ole Wie 2 207 1 ON 2 8 or y il ero OK G A Trace Function OL Fro THRACE cd dd dcccceis ee ee NAANA ke SS WS RIS glgleleus HER RR Rs ANS OK 02 TEACE SEOD coh oo 55 5b s dcdde e556 bea SRE Ee oO RN OK 03 Tame Stalp erre scdcacccue eva bas PREG OE OS Re aR aE A OK Combination 01 B to A Time Measurement FPGA counter 0c eee eee OK 02 B to A Time Measurement G A counter 2 c cee eee eee eee OK 03 D to C Time Measurement G A counter ccscsiissssni ttr eee hiai OK Parallel Access 01y Tnkernal ROM Parallel TEBE aodigic ccies a asdtdieid e amp oo enarades AnI OK 02 Tnkernal RAM Paral lel Togt iccas5isis s r rrii Boas 89 SG aFERH Andes eee ee OK 03
159. ducts listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas products are attached or affixed the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very high You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your products Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment 12 This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written approval from Renesas 13 Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document Renesas semiconductor products or if you have any other inquiries Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page iii of iv RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page iv of iv REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS IMPORTANT INFORMATION READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism Emulator Product Throughout this document the term emulator product shall be defined as the following products produced only by Renesas Technology Corp excluding all subsidiary products e Emulator station e PC interface board e User system interface board e Cable The user system or a host computer is not included in this definition Purpose of the Emulator Product This emu
160. dware Specifications 3 4 7 Emulator State and Internal Modules Operation of some internal modules depends on the emulator s state Tables 3 3 and 3 4 show the relation between the emulator s state and operation of the internal modules Table 3 3 State of the H8SX 1527 Emulator and Operation of Internal Modules Operation During Operation while Emulation Emulation is Halted Execution or Step Internal Module Break Execution DMAC DMA controller Yes Yes TPU 16 bit timer pulse unit Yes Yes PPG programmable pulse generator Yes Yes WDT watchdog timer No Yes SCI serial communication interface Yes Yes A D converter Yes Yes HCAN controller area network Yes Yes SSU synchronous serial communication Yes Yes unit I O port Yes Yes H UDI user debugging interface Not available Not available Note The user cannot use the H UDI because it is being used by the emulator Table 3 4 State of the H8SX 1527R Emulator and Operation of Internal Modules Operation During Operation while Emulation Emulation is Halted Execution or Step Internal Module Break Execution DMAC DMA controller Yes Yes TPU 16 bit timer pulse unit Yes Yes PPG programmable pulse generator Yes Yes WDT watchdog timer No Yes SCI serial communication interface Yes Yes A D converter Yes Yes RCAN controller area network Yes Yes SSU synchronous serial commu
161. e m After Condition Match ia Combination with the next channel C Address Range Trace C Acquisition Condition C None Address sot TO End m Output Trigger J Enable output trigger Static Selection 2 Static ng Static C TASKS Figure 4 43 Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 Dialog Box Trace Stop Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 116 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 3 An address must be set as the condition Uncheck Don t Care on the Address page of the Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 dialog box Then use the Editor window to refer to the address on the line that includes a i j within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Start edit box In this example enter H 00001048 This completes the setting of the address Click the OK button to close the Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 dialog box Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 fe Others static static static Figure 4 44 Trace Acquisition Condition Channel 1 Dialog Box Address Page Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 117 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 Items that have been set are displayed in the list box on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box Click the Close button on this dialog box x Sequential Trace Stop Boog wo woe we e I Re
162. e Debug Sessions dialog box to list add or remove the debug session Debug Settings Opens the Debug Settings dialog box to set the debugging conditions or download modules Reset CPU E Resets the target hardware and sets the PC to the reset vector address Go F5 tur Starts executing the user program at the current PC Reset Go Shift F5 cy Resets the target hardware and executes the user program from the reset vector address Go To Cursor fm me Starts executing the user program at the current PC until the PC reaches the address indicated by the current text cursor position Set PC To Cursor Pc Sets the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor Run Launches the Run Program dialog box allowing the user to enter the PC or PC breakpoint during executing the user program Display PC Shift Ctrl Y Opens the Editor or Disassembly window at the address of the PC Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 158 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Appendix A Menus Table A 1 GUI Menus cont Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Button Remarks Debug cont Step In F11 P Executes a block of user program before breaking Step Over F10 P Executes a block of user program before breaking If a subroutine call is reached then the subroutine will not be entered Step Out Shift
163. e Monitor toolbar button to display the Monitor Settings dialog box Monite 2 x Monitor Setting Name monitort r Options al Address Size byte H0020 x Access Format BYTE ASCII ba JV Auto Refresh at rate ms D 00500 JV Beading the Initial Value r Color Change Indicator Chance O YS Foreground oe Background Cir MV Mayfly m Detail DETAIL NOT SUPPORTED m History Figure 3 14 Monitor Setting Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 27 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging Name Decides the name of the monitor window Options Sets monitor conditions Address Sets the start address for monitoring Size Sets the range for monitoring Access Sets the access size to be displayed in the monitor window Auto Refresh at rate Sets the interval for acquisition by monitoring 500 ms at minimum Reading the Initial Value Selects reading of the values in the monitored area when the monitor window is opened Color Sets the method to update monitoring and the attribute of colors Change Indicator Selects how to display the values that have changed during monitoring available when Reading the Initial Value has been selected No change No color change Change Color is changed according to the Foreground and Background options Gray Those data with values that have not
164. e eee OK 04 EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling 52U cceceee eee cece cece cc eee eee OK 05 EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling MPU 2 cece eee eee eee OK 06 EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling MPU 2 eee cece eee eee eeeeee OK 07 EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling MPU 4 20eee cece eee eee eeee OK 08 EMU 12MHz MPU 12MHz Sampling MPU 8 200eee eee eee eee eee OK 09 SMO 12MH2 MPU 48MHz Sampling 20nS 2 5 sada sees oe eee hee Ssys ees OK 10 EMU 4MHz MPU 32MHz Sampling 20S se eee e eee eee s eee iis OK 121 EMU 3 5 7MH2 MPU 35 7MHzZ Sampling AOUD cccuceccseegan eon sccaaacees OK 12 EMU 35 9MHz MPU 35 9MHz Sampling 20ns 08 OK Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 35 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 Emulation Monitor OIF SAUD RES s s 3i5 scsccarieituctentstastestantet esate 55 s oon as aS CaaS oue Mate eR ce Wee Me ad id A Tatars AR ASUS SBAE SKIP OD TERS iia c5 88 sh E Fava soa heven SSL et Gab EEEREN ce ile S ee aise ie Rhee SKIP OS AOE arer rri ENARA N ares EEEE ig aNepseauseaoe eka OK G A Break Function 01y AGGrESS Condition ssiecec enirere aE ECan e KAA OK 02 Data Condition 2 256540 niian N ARRA OK 03 Control Signal Condition ASEDSHH HL LH HL 222 OK 04 Function Code Condition ASEST3 0 cssccscccatecericuneseccaceess OK 05 Control Signal Condition CESI cok veda gee Son
165. e hardware break or internal break 2 On Chip ROM RAM Area If an attempt is made to access the on chip ROM RAM area the on chip ROM RAM area in the MCU installed in the emulator is accessed To break user program execution when the on chip ROM RAM area is written to or accessed use the hardware break or internal break 3 4 2 Power Down Modes Sleep Software Standby Hardware Standby and All Module Clock Stop For reduced power consumption the MCU has sleep software standby hardware standby and all module clock stop modes 1 Sleep and Software Standby Modes e Break The MCU can be taken out of the sleep and software standby modes either in the normal ways or through satisfaction of a break condition forced break When restarting after a break the user program will restart at the instruction following the SLEEP instruction e Trace Trace information is not acquired in these modes e Memory access with emulator functions For information on displaying and modifying the contents of memory in the sleep and software standby modes refer to section 5 4 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory in the Debugger Part 3 4 3 Interrupts During execution and step execution the user can interrupt the MCU Interrupt sources are retained while emulation is halted break mode In such cases interrupt processing commences immediately after emulation is restarted Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 25 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100
166. e specified start address range and then stops with a detected prefetch cycle in the specified end address range The execution count is incremented every time the program passes the end address range Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 69 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 4 Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Performance An Measurement Method PA1 Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Y Range Name PA1 Range Access Area Range Start Address H o0000000 j Start Address H o0000000 f End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 TASK D gt Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Others Address Control Mode PC TASK Selection Static TASK Gelection2 Static Time Measurement Unit 20ns TASK Selecting Static OK Figure 3 41 Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Range The range for the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Access Area Range The access range for the Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Measures the number of times the range specified as the access range is accessed from the range specified by the start and end addresses The execution count in the range is measured with Time Of Specified Range Measurement mode Rev 11 00 J
167. e task ID is 0 OS is displayed here During the execution of task IDs other than those specified for TASK Selection 1 to TASK Selection 3 OTHER is displayed here 3 Trace Information Acquisition Condition Trace Acquisition Condition Channel n Dialog Box When TASK Selection has been set up the condition settings change in the following ways Address page in the Trace Acquisition Condition Channel n dialog box Address Outside Range TASK ID Sets the address bus condition Outside Range is disabled TASK ID is added to the Address page The TASK Selection 1 to TASK Selection 3 settings in the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box are selectable as conditions To set values other than those specified in RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties as a condition select OTHER here Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 81 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 12 4 Performance Measurement Conditions for Measurement The following conditions are included among those selectable under the Measurement Method option for measurement of execution Setting the Measurement Method option Performance Analysis Properties page Sets a condition for measurement TASK ID Allows specification of the values set for TASK Selection 1 to TASK Selection 3 in the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box as conditions To set values
168. ecifications Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 1 Environmental Conditions Observe the conditions listed in table 3 1 when using the emulator The following environmental conditions must be satisfied otherwise the user system and the emulator will not operate normally The USER PROGRAM will be LOST CAUTION Table 3 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C Storage 10 to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max AC input power Voltage 100 V to 240 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption 75 W Ambient gases There must be no corrosive gases present Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 17 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Figures 3 1 shows the external dimensions and mass of the E6000H emulator External dimensions of the E6000H emulator station 222 0 Mass of the emulator 3 0 kg Unit mm Tolerance 1 0 mm Figure 3 1 External Dimensions and Mass of the Emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 18 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 3 User System Interface Circuit 3 3 1 User System Interface Circuit The circuits that interface the MCU in the emulator to the use
169. ed between the user system and the MCU on the evaluation chip board the precision of conversion is lower than that of the actual MCU Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 26 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 7 Emulator State and Internal Modules Operation of some internal modules depends on the emulator s state Table 3 3 shows the relation between the emulator s state and operation of the internal modules Table 3 3 Emulator s State and Operation of Internal Modules Operation During Operation while Emulation Emulation is Halted Execution or Step Internal Module Break Execution DMAC DMA controller Yes Yes TPU 16 bit timer pulse unit Yes Yes WDT watchdog timer No Yes SCI serial communication interface Yes Yes A D converter Yes Yes RCAN controller area network Yes Yes SSU synchronous serial communication Yes Yes unit Motor control PWM Yes Yes 16 bit PWM Yes Yes SDG sound generator Yes Yes D A converter Yes Yes WAT watch timer Yes Yes 1 O port Yes Yes H UDI user debugging interface Not available Not available Note The user cannot use the H UDI because it is being used by the emulator 3 4 8 Differences in Values of Registers Note that certain general and control registers of both emulators are initialized whenever the system is activated or the MCU is reset by a command Table 3 4 Initial Values of Registers
170. ed here When a channel is used for the sequential trace stop function S is displayed next to the channel number When a reset condition for a sequential trace stop is enabled R is displayed next to channel 8 PtoP is for use in the Point to Point trace UNUSED is displayed next to the channel number if that channel is not available Clicking this button opens the Trace Acquisition Condition Channel n dialog box n channel number or PtoP which allows the user to set a break condition for a selected channel Clears the settings made for the selected channel Clears the settings made for all of the channels Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 49 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 2 Other page Trace Acquisition Properties 2 xi Condition Other When trace buffer full No action v Time measurment unit 20ns nd Selection of the trace contents Execute code Irq hd Cancel Apply Figure 3 28 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Other Page When trace buffer full Selects an action to take when the trace buffer becomes full No action Overwrites the oldest information in the trace buffer Stop trace Stops trace acquisition without stopping the user program execution Stop execution and trace Stops the user program execution Time measurement unit Selects the minimum time unit for the time stamping of the bus trace information 52us Time stamping is in minimum time u
171. ed to the outlet The emulator is connected to the user system by using the user system interface board or the user system interface connectors installed on the bottom of the E6000H evaluation chip board 2 Connecting the User System Interface Board AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system and check pin numbers on the connectors and IC socket before connecting or disconnecting the USER SYSTEM INTERFACE BOARD Connection with the power on or incorrect connection will damage the emulator user system interface board and user system and result in a FIRE HAZARD For details on the method of connecting the user system interface board refer to the descriptions of the user system interface boards for individual H8SX 1650 E6000H series products Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 10 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 3 Connection by the User System Interface Connectors AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system or emulator or result in PERSONAL INJURY Also the USER PROGRAM will be LOST For correct connection check the location of pin 1 Connect pin 1 on the user system connector to the connector installed at the bottom of the E6000H user system interface board When connecting the connector prevent the upper or lo
172. en the Status window and see the current status of the debugging platform Target Device Configuration 00000000 OOOSFFFF Internal 00040000 OOFFSFFF Reserved Area OOFF3S000 OOFFBFFF Internal RAM OOFFCOOO OOFFESFF Reserved Area OOFFEAOO OOFFFEFF Internal I0 OOFFFFZO OOFFFFFF Internal IQ System Memory Resources Emulation RAM Module No SIMM fitted Ram Bases 0 not used l not used 2 not used 3 not used Memory Loaded Area Figure 3 11 Status Window The Status window has following three sheets e Memory sheet Displays information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file e Platform sheet Displays information about the environment for emulation typically including CPU type and emulation mode e Events sheet Displays information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information Note The items that can be set in this window depend on the emulator in use For details refer to the online help Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 24 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 4 Reading and Displaying the Emulator Information Regularly Use the Extended Monitor window to know the changing information on the emulator no matter the user program is running or halted Note The extended monitor function does not affect the execution of the user program since it monitors the user s
173. ended application Renesas makes no representations warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the information in this document or Renesas products 7 With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications Renesas products are not designed manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems or equipment or systems for transportation and traffic healthcare combustion control aerospace and aeronautics nuclear power or undersea communication transmission If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes please contact a Renesas sales office beforehand Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above 8 Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below 1 artificial life support devices or systems 2 surgical implantations 3 healthcare intervention e g excision administration of medication etc 4 any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers
174. enerated by the tutorial function are stored and sorts them in the ascending order e The change function then sorts the array which was sorted in ascending order by the sort function in descending order The file tutorial cpp contains the source code for the tutorial program The file Tutorial abs isa compiled load module in the Dwarf2 format Notes 1 After recompilation the addresses may differ from those given in this section 2 This section describes general usage examples for the emulator For the particular specifications of each product refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help 3 The operation address of Tutorial abs attached to each product differs depending on the product Replace the address used in this section with the correct address in each product after checking that it is placed on the corresponding line of the source program 4 In this tutorial the H8SX E6000H emulator is taken as an example File paths or the appearance of figures differ depending on the product Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 83 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 2 Open a workspace by following the procedure listed in section 2 1 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace Running the High performance Embedded Workshop Select the following directory Note OS installation drive Workspace Tutorial E6000H 1650 The directory mentioned above cannot be specified depending on the version of the software In su
175. erating system in use the foreground and background colors may not be selectable Monitor Setting Name monitori r Options Address HooFFe400 d gl Size byte Hoo O Access Format eyte asem H IV Auto Refresh at rate ms oso IV Beading the Initial Value r Color Change Indicator Change H Foreground E Background cF MV Mayfly m Detail DETAIL NOT SUPPORTED Detail m History Figure 4 69 Monitor Setting Dialog Box Setting Completed Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 136 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 3 Click the OK button to open the Monitor window monitor OOFFB400 lolx Z g fis z Bye eson x Address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B D E F Value OOFFB400 00 OO 79 4B OO OO 59 E2 00 OO 44 6B OO OO 41 C6 yK Dk A OOFFB410 00 OO 3F 54 OO OO 27 81 OO OO ic FB OO OO 16 TE 2T cod Figure 4 70 Monitor Window 4 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu When the contents of the address range changes by execution the updated values are in red i e the color that was selected in the Foreground and Background combo boxes Values will be displayed in black if they have not been updated or a certain period of time has elapsed since the last update nitor1 OOFFB400 i x g g is z Bve eson x 00563ms 0 1 2 3
176. erface LAN adapter or USB adapter can be connected Marked PC IF Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 4 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 2 2 Front end Unit Configuration The names of the components on the front end unit are listed below uo 124 b s Va HS1527KEPHEOH NY m rene RENESAS 0 162 8 43 6 0 6 12 5 18 5 5 Note The model name of the H8SX 1527R E6000H emulator is HS1527REPHEOH Figure 1 4 Configuration and Dimensions of the Emulator s Front end Unit a Crystal oscillator terminals For installing a crystal oscillator to be used as a external clock source for the MCU b External probe connector For connecting the external probe for external signal tracing and multibreak detection c User system interface cable For connecting the user system interface cable connector d Trace cable For connecting the front end unit to the emulator station Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 5 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview 1 3 System Configuration The emulator must be connected to a host computer via the selected PC interface board PCI bus or PC card bus LAN adapter or USB adapter For details on the PC interface boards available f
177. ess Word data is read and written in a single bus cycle Word data is only valid as the size of an access When a specified address is not a multiple of two 2n several cycles will be generated as shown in tables 5 4 and 5 5 Set address and data conditions according to these tables Note that word data is only valid as the size of an access Byte access Byte data is read and written in a single bus cycle A data condition is only valid for a byte access when specified as byte Any address condition whether an even or odd address is valid Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 144 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 6 3 On Emulator Break e A break will occur several cycles after a condition is satisfied e The states of IRQ15 to IRQO are ORed and this result is applied as the IRQ condition e The address and data conditions are satisfied on the bus cycles where the values on the address bus or data bus match Consider the following points when setting these conditions Longword access Longword data is read and written in a single bus cycle A data condition is only valid for a longword access when specified as longword When a specified address is not a multiple of four 4n several cycles will be generated as shown in tables 5 4 and 5 5 Set address and data conditions according to these tables Note that longword data is only valid as the size of an access Word ac
178. ess condition set as an end condition Execution time measurement Measures execution time between two points by using the trace acquisition conditions Trigger output Outputs a pulse from trigger pins when the specified conditions are satisfied The trace acquisition condition is set in the Trace Acquisition dialog box that is displayed by selecting Acquisition from the popup menu The Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box has the pages Condition and Other Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 47 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 1 Condition page Condition Other Combination rm Sequential Trace Stop Cast 20 30 457 BT BT 7 J ResetPoint Delay m Run time count between trigger outputs M Use From 1 to 2 From gto 4 C Frombto6 From tog JV Free trace Reset Reset All Cancel Apply Figure Sequential Trace Stop 3 27 Trace Acquisition Properties Dialog Box Condition Page Use this option to set a sequential trace stop by using channels to 7 The sequential trace stop function allows trace acquisition to stop when the conditions of several channels are satisfied in the specified order Two to seven pass points and one reset point are selectable as sequential trace stop conditions The conditions are satisfied in the order of 1 to 7 To use a sequential trace stop select the checkbox of the channe
179. essssessesssesessessssessesssessssesssonssenesseseees 29 3 1 Environmental Conditions 3 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass 3 3 User System Interface Circuit 3 3 1 User System Interface Circuit 3 4 Support of the Target MCU 3 4 1 Memory Space 3 4 2 Power Down Modes Sleep Software Standby and Hardware Standby 3 4 3 Interrupts 3 4 4 Control Input Signals RES NMI BREQ WAIT and STBY 3 4 5 Watchdog Timer WDT 3 4 6 A D Converter 3 4 7 Emulator State and Internal Modules 3 4 8 Differences in Values of Registers 3 4 9 Emulation Memory 3 5 Notes Specific to the H8SX 1650 E6000H Emulator 3 5 1 Custom Device Function 3 5 2 Exception Processing of Sleep Instructions 3 5 3 Subclock Operation Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure scscscsscsssssssssoscssssssssssesssesssoecoscnsesesesevssesssevossnsssonsoesassassses 4 1 System Set Up for Diagnostic Program Execution 4 2 Test Item of the Diagnostic Program m 4 3 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program s ssseereresesessestereresesesreresesresrsstsestenenrnesneseneenenesnene 61 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page Ill of X RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 4 4 Repair Request Sheet ssscccccsssecsesssssvsesssieesenssinssonsssansenssneasenstseoraeeannaresaniateianndnsnvensnniensananinaminmnemaiie 66 H8SX 1527 and H8SX 1527R Hardware Part cccccccscccssscccssccesseecessecceseccesseceeseeceessecesseeesseeeesseees 1 Sect
180. face board in the host computer and connect the supplied PC interface cable to the board 3 Connect the PC interface cable to the emulator 4 Connect the supplied AC power cable to the emulator 5 Boot the host computer up and enter the command input wait state of the command prompt Windows 2000 6 or Windows XP Turn on the E6000H emulator switch Note To execute the diagnostic program firstly turn on the power of the emulator The diagnostic program checks the initial state of the hardware Therefore after turning on the power do not activate the High performance Embedded Workshop before executing the diagnostic program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 29 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 2 Table 4 1 shows the test items of this diagnostic program Table 4 1 Test Items of the Diagnostic Program Test Item of the Diagnostic Program HS1527KEPH60H Test No Test Item Description 1 Main Board Access Register test in the E6000H main board 2 Emulation Board Access Register test in the E6000H emulation board 3 Evaluation Board Access Register test in the E6000H s front end unit 4 Basic Function Test of the basic functions 5 GO to BREAK Time Measurement Test of the execution time measurement function Emulation Monitor Test of the emulation monitor G A Break Function Test of the G A break function G A Performance Anal
181. flow Stops trace acquisition when the trace buffer in the emulator station overflows No break will occur even when the trace acquisition stops Trace stop Stops trace acquisition when the specified conditions are satisfied In this mode trace acquisition stops without stopping the user program execution Up to 12 points can be set independently as trace stop conditions No break will occur even when the trace acquisition stops Address range trace Acquires trace information of instructions or operands accessed in the range subroutine between the start and end addresses Note that however when the selected subroutine calls another subroutine no trace information will be acquired from the called subroutine Up to 12 points can be set independently as the address ranges Conditional trace Only acquires trace information from the points where the specified conditions are satisfied Up to 12 points can be set independently as the conditions Address range conditional trace Accesses instructions or operands in the range subroutine between the start and end addresses and only acquires trace information in the bus cycles that satisfy the conditions This mode is a combination of address range trace and conditional trace Up to six points can be set independently as the address ranges with conditions Point to Point trace Acquires trace information from the satisfaction of the address condition set as a start condition to that of the addr
182. g 1 6us OK 04 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling 52us OK 05 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU OK 06 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 2 222ee0000 OK 07 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 4 2 2005 OK 08 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 8 22 22 e0005 OK 09 EMU 12Mhz MPU 48Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 10 EMU 4Mhz MPU 32Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 11 EMU 35 7Mhz MPU 35 7Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 12 EMU 35 9Mhz MPU 35 9Mhz Sampling 20ns OK 13 EMU f 1Mhz MPU f 2Mhz Sampling 20ns SKIP Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 39 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 6 Emulation Monitor 01 RESERVED 02 RESERVED OS AAS RG Te sie sisi sik hk hake eile She E ace aGity ocr tnctncioals 8 S4E ee ere AAA ERS OK 7 G A Break Function 01 AdGre ss COn CION aisanana a Geen or bree SNS asl KRG aS Meee SS OK 2 Data Conde 5433 2 a a e sravdy av E d desn uevevevere wuss aie ssl aGs OK 03 Control Signal Condition ASEDSHH HL LH HL OK 04 Function Code Condition ASEST3 0 c ccc cece sr OK 05 RESERVED 06 Control Signal Condition CB22 19 ssicsss sessen nn ees OK 07 Control Signal Condition CB18 16 c ssse esse eee OK 8 G A Performance Analysis Function 01 Time
183. ght hand mouse button is clicked If the cursor is not placed on a function when the right hand mouse button is clicked this menu option is displayed in gray characters e View Profile Chart Displays the Profile Chart window for the specific function on which the cursor is placed when the right hand mouse button is clicked If the cursor is not placed on a function when the right hand mouse button is clicked this menu option is displayed in gray characters e Enable Profiler Toggles acquisition of profile data When profile data acquisition is active a check mark is shown to the left of the menu text e Clear Data Clears the number of times functions are called and profile data Data in the List sheet and Tree sheet in the Profile window are also cleared Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 77 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging e Multiple View If the Profile Chart window is going to be opened when it has already been opened selects whether another window is to be opened or the same window is to be used to display data When a check mark is shown to the left side of the menu text another window is opened e Output Profile Information File Displays the Save Profile Information File dialog box Profiling results are saved in a profile information file pro extension The optimizing linkage editor optimizes user programs according to the profile information in this file For details of the optimi
184. ging 3 1 3 Selecting the Interface to be Connected Checking Change driver in start up on the Configuration Properties dialog box allows a selection of the driver next time the emulator is connected E6000H Driver Details Driver Emulator PCI Card Driver X r Details Interface Pci x Channel Emulator PCI Card Interface x r Configuration Figure 3 3 Driver Details Dialog Box Driver Selects the driver that connects the High performance Embedded Workshop and the emulator Details Sets the details of the driver being connected Interface The name of the interface to be connected This should not be changed in this emulator Channel Channel for the selected interface This should not be changed in this emulator Configuration Driver setting Configure A dialog box for setting will be displayed when the driver supports the configuration dialog Note that this item is not available with this emulator Change driver in start up Checking this box selects the driver when the emulator is connected the next time Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 16 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 1 4 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box Selecting Setup gt Emulator gt Memory Resource or clicking the Emulator Memory Resource toolbar button a opens the Memory Mapping dialog box ry Mapping System Memory Re
185. gs of the emulator 1 Operating mode 2 Voltage of the target system Vv 3 Clock selection Emulator clock Xtal oscillator or external clock Circle one item above 4 Operating frequency MHz 5 Failure phenomenon 6 Error in debugging 7 Error detected by the diagnostic program 8 Connection between the High performance Embedded Workshop and the emulator has not been established Content of the error message For errors other than the above fill in the box below Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 68 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS H8SX 1527 and H8SX 1527R Hardware Part Section 1 Overview 1 1 AD WN fF Section Overview Notes on Usage Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Check all components with the component list after unpacking the emulator Never place heavy objects on the casing Observe the following conditions in the area where the emulator is to be used Make sure that the internal cooling fans on the sides of the emulator must be at least 20 cm 8 away from walls or other equipment Keep out of direct sunlight or heat Refer to section 3 1 Environmental Conditions Use in an environment with constant temperature and humidity Protect the emulator from dust Avoid subjecting the emula
186. gt s6 a 8 57 0001086 p_sam gt s9 a 9 58 00010ae delete p_sam 59 Tutorial cpp 28 Profile Figure 4 64 Editor Window Setting an On Chip Breakpoint 4 To use the profiling function for measurement select Reset Go from the Debug menu Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 132 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 5 The Profile window is shown below Function Variable Sample change long Sample sort long Sample Sample 00001334 _ malloc _malloc free DIVL 3 _srand _rand __CALL_INIT operator new unsigned __INITSCT tutorial _main _sbrk OR i i i i i i i me 000020 6 00002046 00002000 00001334 0000128 00001284 000011CE 00001186 00001148 00001174 0000114E 00001110 00001088 0000102E 00001024 00001000 H 00000054 H 00000080 H 00000046 H 00000000 H 000000A6 H 00000004 H 000000BC H 00000000 H 00000000E H 0000002E H 0000001E H 0000003E H 00000000 H 00000088 H 00000004 H 0000002A 10 10 BPRePRPRPH 268 Figure 4 65 Profile Window List Sheet 6 Click the Tree tab on the Profile window to display the Tree sheet __INITSCT _srand __ CALL INIT B main B tutorial H Sample Sample Sample change long Sample sort long H rand l Show Functions Variables hd wa 2 00000400 00001058 00001148 00001148 00001024
187. h OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting the CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR Otherwise the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Follow the procedure listed below to install the crystal oscillator 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Check that the power LED is not lit 2 Attach the crystal oscillator into the terminals on the emulator s front end unit figure 2 3 Be careful to ensure that the terminals do not touch the casing 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power The crystal oscillator will then be automatically set and started up This function will allow the execution of the user program at the operating frequency of the user system even when the user system is not connected to the emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 13 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Enlarged view Crystal oscillator Crystal oscillator terminals gt HBisa7kKePHeagH PCN2 RENESAS Note The model name of the H8SX 1527R E6000H emulator is HS1527REPH60H Figure 2 3 Installing the Crystal Oscillator External Clock Follow the procedure listed below to select the external clock 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Check that the power LED is not lit 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the user system and supply a clock signal through the EXTAL pin from the user system 3 Turn on the user
188. h the component list after unpacking the emulator Never place heavy objects on the casing Observe the following conditions in the area where the emulator is to be used Make sure that the internal cooling fans on the sides of the emulator must be at least 20 cm 8 away from walls or other equipment Keep out of direct sunlight or heat Refer to section 3 1 Environmental Conditions Use in an environment with constant temperature and humidity Protect the emulator from dust Avoid subjecting the emulator to excessive vibration Refer to section 3 1 Environmental Conditions Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses Before using the emulator s power supply check its specifications such as power voltage and frequency When moving the emulator take care not to subject it to strong vibration or mechanical shock After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 2 Preparation before Use Supply power to the emulator and connected parts after connecting all cables Cables must not be connected or removed while the power is on For details on differences between the target MCU and the emulator refer to section 3 4 Support of the Target MCU Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 1 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview 1 2 Emulator Hardware Components The emulator consists of an E6000H station and the E6000H s front end unit By installing a user system
189. han lt Drive gt Diag 1527 such as gt lt Drive gt Diag 1527 TM1527 PCI Enter If the diagnostic program is initiated when the current directory is not lt Drive gt Diag 1527 the diagnostic program will not operate correctly When S is added to the command line as in gt TM1527 PCI S Enter steps 1 to 15 will be repeatedly executed To stop execution in this case enter Q Notes 1 lt Drive gt is the drive name of the CD ROM drive 2 Do not remove the CD R from the CD ROM drive during execution of the test program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 31 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure The following messages are displayed during the test There are 15 steps in this test Message Description H8SX 1527 E6000H Emulator Tests V Test program start Copyright c 2003 Renesas Technology Corp message x x shows the version number Loading driver nscicassacupe reese eee Sees OK Use PCI Shows that the PC interface board is correctly installed in the host computer Inteiali2ing drive sss esse eee ASS OK Searching for interface card OK Checking emulator is connected OK Shows that the E6000H emulator is correctly connected to the host computer Emulator board information Main board ID H Emulation board ID H Shows the ID number of the E6000H emulator Normal started at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Shows the time when the diagnostic program was
190. he High performance Embedded Workshop products refer to the High performance Embedded Workshop user s manual This manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language programs how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the respective manuals Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Visual SourceSafe is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All brand or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Document Conventions This manual uses the following typographic conventions Table 1 Typographic Conventions Convention Meaning Menu gt Menu Option Bold text with gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C Uppercase names are used to indicate filenames enter this string Used to indicate text that must be entered excluding the quotes Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key gt When this symbol is used it is always located in the left hand margin It indicates that the The how to symbol text to its immediate right is describing how t
191. he address on the line that has a i j within the tutorial function and enter this address in the Address edit box In this example enter H 0000105c e Make the following settings in the boxes on the Count page Uncheck the Don t Care checkbox Enter D 5 in the Count edit box Note The content of this dialog box differs depending on the product For details on each product refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help Cancel Apply Figure 4 39 On Chip Break Channel 4 Dialog Box e Click the OK button Then click the Close button on the Breakpoint Properties dialog box The on chip breakpoint that has been set is displayed in the Event window Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help Close the Event window Then select Reset Go from the Debug menu to stop the tutorial program at on chip breakpoints The program runs and then stops at the breakpoint that has been set The cause of a break can be checked in Cause of last break of the Status window Refer to the Watch window for the value of variable i The value is 4 indicating that the break occurred after the condition had been satisfied five times Then delete the on chip breakpoint Clicking the right hand mouse button on the Event window displays a popup menu Select Delete All from
192. he column is displayed or not Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 21 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code If you have a source file open right click to open the pop up menu and select the View Disassembly option to open a Disassembly view at the same address as the current Source view It is also possible to view the disassembly using the new integrated Disassembly view in the source file Tf you do not have a source file but wish to view code at assembly language level then select one of the following operations e Click on the View Disassembly toolbar button 25 e Choose the View gt Disassembly menu option e Press Ctrl D The Disassembly window opens at the current PC location void main void while 1 tutorial 0001024 5502 main BSR tutorial 8 000102C 40FC BRA _main 8 void tutorial void 000102E 01106DF2 tutorial STM L ER2 ER3 SP long j int i class Sample p_sam p_sam new Sample 0001032 1480 SUB L ERO ERO 0001034 S5E002000 JSR Sample Sample 24 0001038 OF83 MOV L ERO ER3 0001034 1922 SUB W R2 R2 j rand 000103C 5E001174 JSR rand 24 0001040 0D01 MOV W RO R1 0001042 17F1 EXTS L ER1 if j lt 0 0001044 4C02 BGE H 1048 8 bd Figure 3 8 Disassembly Window In this window the following information is shown on the left as information lines e First column
193. he model name of the H8Sx 1527R E6000H emulator is HS1527REPHBOH Pin No Probe Name Signal Name Note 1 1 Probe input 0 Synchronous break 2 2 Probe input 1 input pin 3 3 Probe input 2 4 4 Probe input 3 5 G GND GND connection pin 6 TUV Trigger output Trigger mode output pin 7 G GND GND connection pin 8 T5V RUN or break High level output at RUNSTEP output Figure 2 2 External Probe Connector Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 12 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 5 Selecting the Clock This emulator supports three types of clock for the MCU a crystal oscillator attached on the emulator s front end unit external clock input from the user system and the emulator internal clock The clock is specified with the Configuration dialog box This emulator can use a clock source running at up to 40 0 MHz as the H8SX 1527 clock input The H8SX 1582 or H8SX 1527R can operate with clock sources running at up to 48 0 MHz CLOCK command Xtal Crystal oscillator 4 to 9 MHz Target External clock 4 to 9 MHz 5 Emulator internal clock 5 MHz 6 Emulator internal clock 6 MHz Crystal Oscillator A crystal oscillator is not supplied with the emulator Prepare and use one that has the same frequency as that of the user system When using a crystal oscillator as the MCU clock source the frequency range must be from 4 to 9 MHz CAUTION Always switc
194. he user system interface board attached to the user system or supplying power to DrVCC Otherwise the emulator product user system interface board and user system will be damaged Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 52 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 Support of the Target MCU 3 4 1 Memory Space The architecture of the H8SX 1600 series MCU allows for a 16 Mbyte memory space 1 Internal I O Area If an attempt is made to access the internal I O area the internal I O area in the MCU installed in the emulator is accessed To break user program execution when the on chip I O area is written to or accessed use the hardware break or internal break 2 Internal RAM Area If an attempt is made to access the internal RAM area the internal RAM area in the MCU installed in the emulator is accessed To break user program execution when the internal RAM area is written to or accessed use the hardware break or internal break 3 External Memory Area The MCU s external memory area can be set with all memory attributes that the emulator supports The emulator includes the 4 Mbyte emulation memory as the external memory area Up to four blocks one block is a maximum of 1 Mbyte can be allocated to the emulation memory To access this emulation memory set wait state cycles with the bus controller 3 4 2 Power Down Modes Sleep Software Standby and Hardware Standby For reduced power consumptio
195. hing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel lt 886 gt 2 2715 2888 Fax lt 886 gt 2 3518 3399 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte Ltd 1 Harbour Front Avenue 06 10 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel lt 65 gt 6213 0200 Fax lt 65 gt 6278 8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co Ltd Kukje Center Bldg 18th FI 191 2 ka Hangang ro Yongsan ku Seoul 140 702 Korea Tel lt 82 gt 2 796 3115 Fax lt 82 gt 2 796 2145 Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel lt 603 gt 7955 9390 Fax lt 603 gt 7955 9510 Colophon 6 2 H8SX E6000H Emulator User s Manual 2CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 211 8668 Japan REJ10J1130 1100
196. hown in figure 5 1 e No_access Area may not be selectable as an attribute of a memory map depending on the emulator in use e No memory exists when No_access Area is selected even though it is defined as an internal memory area e No_access Area is not selectable when the attribute of the address range selected in the Memory Mapping dialog box is On Chip or User e The minimum unit for memory mapping is one block 1 Mbyte Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 140 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product H x00_0000 H x00_0000 SBO 64 kbytes H x10_0000 H x01_0000 LBO 612 kbytes SB1 64 kbytes LB1 512 kbytes SB2 64 kbytes 11 02_0000 H x18_0000 H x20_0000 Res LB2 1 Mbyte SB3 64 kbytes 4x03_0000 H x04_0000 H x30_0000 LB3 1 Mbyte SB4 64 kbytes LB4 4 Mbytes SBS 64 kbytes 05_0000 LB5 4 Mbytes SB6 64 kbytes 11x06_0000 H x07_0000 H x40_0000 H x80_0000 HxC0_0000 T Bg 1 Mbyte SB7 64 kbytes LB7 1 Mbyte SB8 64 kbytes H x08_0000 H xD0_0000 H xE0_0000 LB8 512 kbytes SB9 64 kbytes H x09_0000 H x0A_0000 HxE8_0000 T Bg 512 kbytes SB10 64 kbytes H xFO_0000 LB10 512 kbytes SB11 64 kbytes H x0B_0000 H xF8_0000 55 504 kbytes SB12 64 kbytes Hx0C_0000 H xFF_E000 7 LB12 4 kbytes SB13 64 kbytes x0D_E000 H xFF_F000 SB14 64 kby
197. ied Enable multi break When this box is checked the multibreak function is enabled This allows breaking the program for several E6000H emulators at the same time by using a trigger input and probe pins Enable SDRAM interface MD3 When this box is checked the SDRAM interface is enabled The emulator detects the state of the MD3 pin on the user system If the state of the MD3 pin is low a warning message will be displayed This option is available only when one of the following MCUs has been selected in Device H8SX 1663_MD_CLK_0O H8SX 1663_MD_CLK_1 H8SX 1664_MD_CLK_0O H8SX 1664_MD_CLK_1 Driver Displays the E6000H driver that is currently installed Change driver in start up When this box is checked selection of a driver will be available next time the emulator is connected Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 14 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 1 2 Customizing the Settings for the Target MCU Selecting Custom Device enable in the Configuration Properties dialog box adds the Custom Device page to the dialog box 1650 E6000H Configuration Properties 4 2 xi General Custom Device ROM RAM 24KB ExRAM OkB x TMR Unit3 p TMR Unit2 m Port TMR Unit TMR Unit0 lt gt MTU lt gt TPU Unit Ch8 6 lt gt TPU Unit Ch11 6 lt gt TPU UnitO Ch2 0 lt gt TPU UnitO Ch5 0 lt gt EXDMAC Ch1
198. igure 4 19 Watch Window Displaying the Variable Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 97 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial The user can click mark at the left side of array a in the Watch window to watch all the elements BR 8 FFB400 ilong 10 R 0 H O00041c6 FFB400 long R 1 H 0000167e FFB404 ilong R 2 H 00002781 FFB408 long R 3 H O0000446b FFB4O0C long R 4 H O000794b FFB410 long R 5 H O00015fb FFB414 long R 6 H O000059e2 FFB418 long R 7 H O0001icfbh FFB41c long R 8 H OO003 54 FFB420 long R 9 H OOO00ff6 FFB424 long i H 000a R2 int Tp watehs A watcha A watcha watcha Figure 4 20 Watch Window Displaying Array Elements Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 98 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 12 Displaying Local Variables The user can display local variables in a function by using the Locals window For example we will examine the local variables in the tutorial function which declares local variables j i and p_sam e Select Locals from the Symbol submenu of the View menu The Locals window is displayed The Locals window shows the local variables in the function currently pointed to by the program counter along with their values Note however that the Locals window is initially empty because local variables are yet to be declared
199. ing the realtime operation For the Watch window refer to section 3 6 3 Watch Window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 29 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 5 6 Hiding the Monitor Window When using the Monitor function to monitor the value of a variable from the Watch window hide the Monitor window for the effective use of the screen The current monitoring information is listed as the submenu when selecting Display gt CPU gt Monitor The list consists of the Monitor window name and the address to start monitoring When the left of the list is checked the Monitor window is being displayed Selecting items of the Monitor window you want to hide from the monitor setting list displays no Monitor window and removes the check mark at the left of the list To display the Monitor window again select the hidden the Monitor window JX Monitor Setting Shift Ctrl E V monitor2 HOOFFBO8O monitor H OOFFBO00 _heap_area Windows Select Figure 3 16 Monitor Setting List Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 30 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 5 7 Managing the Monitor Window Selecting Display gt CPU gt Monitor gt Windows Select displays the Windows Select dialog box In this window the current monitoring condition is checked and the new monitoring condition is added edited and deleted in succession
200. ins of the evaluation chip board are firmly connected to the user system s ground Emulator power User system supply cable power supply cable Ground m 100 V to 240 V AC power Figure 2 8 Connecting the Frame Ground 2 2 9 PC Interface Board Specifications For details on the PC interface board LAN adapter or USB adapter refer to their description notes Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 27 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 28 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 1 Environmental Conditions Observe the conditions listed in table 3 1 when using the emulator The following environmental conditions must be satisfied otherwise the user system and the emulator will not operate normally The USER PROGRAM will be LOST CAUTION Table 3 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C Storage 10 to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max AC input power Voltage 100 V to 240 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption 75 W Ambient gases There must be no corrosive gases present Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 29 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J113
201. interface cable option to your host computer the emulator can be connected in the same package as the device PC interface option includes a PC interface board PCI bus and PC card bus a LAN adapter connected with the network and a USB adapter connected with the USB interface By connecting the emulator to the host computer via those interfaces the High performance Embedded Workshop can be used for debugging For details on the PC interface boards available for PCI bus and PC card bus specifications the LAN adapter and the USB adapter refer to the relevant descriptive documents USB cable USB adapter option option c PC PC interface PC interface cable cable option option ie Network LAN adapter option fEsooor PC interface cable option PFC interface cable option _ PC interface board option E6000H station lgh 4 E6000HF s front end unit Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 2 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 Figure 1 1 Emulator Hardware Components RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 2 1 E6000H Station Components A Part of Photos may be Different from Real Appearances The names of the components on the front rear panel of the E6000H station are listed below Front Panel EBO00H teusas Figure 1 2 E6000H Station Front Panel a POWER lamp Is lit up while the E6000H station is supplied with power b RUN lamp Is lit up while the user prog
202. ion from this menu to display the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box Ensure that Free Trace is checked and then click the Close button Trace Acquisition Properties i 21x Condition Other Combination r Sequential Trace Stop Big wom oom mo me J ResetPoint Delay m Run time count between trigger outputs TL Use From 1 to 2 From gto 4 From 5to6 C From 7 to 8 Back IV Free trace Figure 4 41 Trace Acquisition Properties Dialog Box Free Trace Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 114 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 2 Set a software breakpoint at the address on the line that has p_sam gt s0 a 0 within the tutorial function refer to section 4 16 1 Software Break Function 3 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Execution stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the trace information Address VariableLabel Data Sz Status Area TASK Probes 00012 00002 10e CMP N OODA 16 P2 00002110 S4 c0a RD L PROG IMU 16 1111 3 0000h00 nmint 00011 00002 11e Vtieditd PD L PROG EMU 16 1111 1 O000h000mint 00010 00002112 er R 2Or0 9 000020 0 79000009 L PROG EHU 16 1111 1 0000h000nink 00009 00002114 ADDL 0028 16 807 00002120 f sbbffb A L PROG ENU 16 1311 0000h000mint 0000A 00002124 afleldde RO L PROG EMH 1 yuna 1 OOOOhO0Oma ne 00097 O0ffbfe0 00000000 RD i MATA 1EAN 1311 3
203. ion Overview The Debugger Part includes the following information Table 1 1 Debugger Part Contents Section Title Content 2 Preparation before Use This section starts with creation of a workspace and ends with connection to the emulator 3 Debugging This section describes this emulator s peculiar debugging operation and the associated windows and dialog boxes Refer to the High performance Embedded Workshop user s manual about High performance Embedded Workshop common functions as below Preparations for Debugging Viewing a Program Operating Memory Displaying Memory Contents as Waveforms Displaying Memory Contents as an Image Modifying the variables Viewing the I O Memory Looking at Registers Executing Your Program Viewing the Function Call History Debugging with the Command Line Interface Elf Dwarf2 Support Looking at Labels 4 Tutorial This section describes how to use the emulator functions by using a tutorial program provided with the emulator 5 Software Specifications and Notes This section describes software specifications and Specific to This Product notes regarding the emulator 6 Error Messages This section describes the contents of error messages that may occur while the emulator is in use and solutions to them Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 1 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 2 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section
204. ion 3 Debugging 3 9 3 Starting Performance Data Acquisition Executing the user program clears the result of previous measurement and automatically starts measuring the rate of execution time according to the conditions that have been set Stopping the user program displays the result of measurement in the Performance Analysis window 3 9 4 Deleting a Measurement Condition Select Reset from the popup menu with a measurement condition selected to delete the condition 3 9 5 Deleting All Measurement Conditions Choose Reset All from the popup menu to delete all the conditions that have been set Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 72 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 10 Profiling Function 3 10 1 Enabling the Profile Choose View gt Performance gt Profile to open the Profile window Choose Enable Profiler from the popup menu of the Profile window The item on the menu will be checked 3 10 2 Specifying Measuring Mode You can specify whether to trace functions calls while profile data is acquired When function calls are traced the relations of function calls during user program execution are displayed as a tree diagram When not traced the relations of function calls cannot be displayed but the time for acquiring profile data can be reduced To stop tracing function calls choose Disable Tree Not traces function call from the popup menu in the Profile window a check mark is shown to the
205. ion l OVERVIEW sis cicicccievessecconcevs vay vouseestuuscvwesczecieeicxsseevcauetecderesvedevsvexevavdeiavesedolaiaca stot cbuiedecereveves 1 1 1 Notes on Usage 1 2 Emulator Hardware Components 1 2 1 E6000H Station Components A Part of Photos may be Different from Real Appearances 1 2 2 Front end Unit Configuration 1 3 System Configuratio 1 3 1 System Configuration Using Various Interfaces Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 Description on Emulator Usage 2 2 Emulator Connection 2 2 1 Connecting the Emulator to the User System 2 2 2 Connecting the User System Interface Cable 2 2 3 Precautions on Connecting the User System 2 2 4 Connecting the External Probe 2 2 5 Selecting the Clock 2 2 6 Connecting the System Ground 2 2 7 PC Interface Board Specifications Section3 Hardware Specifications 3 1 Environmental Conditions 3 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass 3 3 User System Interface Circuit 3 3 1 User System Interface Circuit 3 4 Support of the Target MCU 3 4 1 Memory Space 3 4 2 Power Down Modes Sleep and Software Standby 3 4 3 Interrupts 3 4 4 Control Input Signals RES and NMI 3 4 5 Watchdog Timer WDT 3 4 6 A D Converter 3 4 7 Emulator State and Internal Modules 3 4 8 Differences in Values of Registers 3 4 9 Differences in Access to the Internal RAM 3 5 Notes Specific to the H8SX 1527 E6000H and H8SX 1527R E60
206. ion time and the execution count in the range between start address and end address Starts measurement with a detected program prefetch at the start address and then stops with a detected program prefetch at the end address The execution count is incremented every time the program is prefetched at the end address of the specified range The execution time measured includes the time spent while being called from the specified range When either from one to four points is selected the maximum and minimum time in the specified range can be measured 3 Start Range To End Range Measurement Performance Ai Measurement Method PA1 Start Range To End Range Measurement x Range Name PA1 Start Range End Range Start Address H oo000000 E Start Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 End Address H o0000000 Common Settings of Performance PA1 8 Address Control Mode PC ection Static Time Measurement Unit 20ns ection2 Static Static 0K ection 3 Figure 3 40 Start Range To End Range Measurement Settings Range Name The name of the range to be measured Start Range The start range for the Start Range To End Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address End Range The end range for the Start Range To End Range Measurement Start Address Start address End Address End address Starts measurement with a detected prefetch cycle in th
207. ions When Enable under TASK STEP in the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box opened by selecting Option gt Emulator gt RTOS Support Function is selected the following step operation functions become applicable to the selected tasks e Step in e Steps into the selected tasks e Step over F Steps over the selected tasks e Step out E Steps out of the selected tasks Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 80 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 12 3 Functions Made Available by TASK Selection 1 Display of the TASK Selection Settings Method of RunTime Count Selection TASK ID H8SX 1650 E6000H Emulator CPU 1600 Emulator PCI Card Driver H85X71650 4 12MHz Ready OOhO0OminO0sO00ms000us Go to Break Selectionl ID 002Z Selection ID 08 Selection3 ID none Platform sheet Selection TASK ID Figure 3 47 Status Window Includes information on the emulation environment such as the CPU type and operating mode Displays the values set for TASK Selection 1 to TASK Selection 3 in the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box 2 Display of Trace Information Trace Window The TASK is added to the items for display TASK When a task selected in TASK Selection 1 to TASK Selection 3 of the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box is being executed its ID is displayed here When th
208. is Product ccccceseseseeeeeeeee 139 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 3 9 5 10 5 11 Supported Hardware 139 Target Platforms Memory Map Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory 5 4 1 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory during Execution 5 4 2 Monitor Function 5 4 3 Parallel Access Function Executing Your Program 5 5 1 Step Execution Event Functions 5 6 1 Software Breakpoints 5 6 2 On Chip Break 5 6 3 On Emulator Break Trace Functions 5 7 1 Displaying the Trace Information 5 7 2 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions 5 7 3 Searching for a Trace Record 5 7 4 Filtering Trace Records Monitor Function Performance Analysis Function 5 9 1 Errors 5 9 2 Notes Profiling Function RTOS Extension Function 5 11 1 Input Values for the TASK ID writing area Input Edit BOX eee eseetseenseetsesnseeneeeseeees Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page VIII of X REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS 5 11 2 Debugging Area for the EOQ00H Emulator iscicisvccssssesiscedsedisecdseadesodsbcscssvssssenedevesdsasdesesucshstsnedssuddavedivdssros 5 11 3 Note on Using the HI1000 4 Debugging Extension 5 12 Input Format 3 SFAT Entering Masks aisir iina ASAA AS EAIA OISEAN TEDO IRSA ASSAR RAA Section 6 Error Messages 6 1 Error Messages of the Emulator 6 1 1 Error Messages at Emulator Initiation 6 1 2 Error Messages during Emulation
209. itions must be satisfied otherwise the user system and the emulator will not operate normally The USER PROGRAM will be LOST CAUTION Table 3 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C Storage 10 to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max AC input power Voltage 100 V to 240 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption 75 W Ambient gases There must be no corrosive gases present Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 17 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 2 Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Figure 3 1 shows the external dimensions and mass of the E6000H emulator External dimensions of the E6000H emulator station 222 0 Mass of the emulator 3 0 kg Unit mm Tolerance 1 0 mm Figure 3 1 External Dimensions and Mass of the Emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 18 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 3 User System Interface Circuit 3 3 1 User System Interface Circuit The circuits that interface the MCU in the emulator to the user system include the level shifter circuits for 5 V and 3 3 V and resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware compensating for FANIN FANOUT
210. l To set a reset condition select the Reset Point checkbox Channel 8 is used for a reset condition When a reset condition is satisfied all the sequential trace stop conditions that have been satisfied will be cleared and the emulator starts checking the first condition again When a sequential trace stop is enabled no setting is available for the channels out of 1 to 7 that are not used for the sequential trace stop function Run time count between trigger outputs Free trace Selects channels for use in execution time measurement Clicking Use allows measurement of time in tracing There are four types of channel combinations consisted of those for the start and the end of measurement 1 2 3 4 5 6 and 7 8 Execution time from satisfaction of the condition on the start channel to that of the condition on the end channel is measured Any trigger output from other channels is invalid because this measurement uses a trigger output Selects the free trace mode When Free trace is enabled any trace acquisition condition set will be ignored Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 48 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging Back List box Edit Reset Reset All Puts the setting back to the previous state at the time the dialog box has been displayed Displays the current settings for each of the channels If no setting has been made for a channel only the channel number is display
211. l trace or Point to Point trace Start Set the start address End Set the end address Berk The address range of a function can be set by Start and End Output Trigger Outputs a trigger after the satisfaction of a trace condition Address Sets address conditions Data Sets data conditions Bus Area Sets access type bus status and read write cycle conditions Probe Sets the levels high or low of the external probe signals PRB1 to PRB4 as the condition Interrupt Sets the levels high or low of the IRQ signals as the condition Count Sets a satisfaction count condition Delay Sets the number of bus cycles delayed after the satisfaction of a trace condition This function allows you to check the trace information before after any of the specified conditions are satisfied When Don t Care has been selected there is no delay Notes 1 The settings to be made on pages Address Data Bus Area Probe Interrupt and Count are the same as those for on emulator break conditions For details on the on emulator break conditions refer to section 3 7 Using the Event Points 2 Set the range in the address range trace so that value of the end address will be larger than that of the start address 3 Two channels are used in the address range conditional trace To perform the address range conditional trace select an odd numbered channel 2n 1 for the address range trace and an even numbered channel
212. lator product is a software and hardware development tool for systems employing the Renesas microcomputer This emulator product must only be used for the above purpose Limited Applications This emulator product is not authorized for use in MEDICAL atomic energy aeronautical or space technology applications without consent of the appropriate officer of a Renesas sales company Such use includes but is not limited to use in life support systems Buyers of this emulator product must notify the relevant Renesas sales offices before planning to use the product in such applications Improvement Policy Renesas Technology Corp including its subsidiaries hereafter collectively referred to as Renesas pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design performance and safety of the emulator product Renesas reserves the right to change wholly or partially the specifications design user s manual and other documentation at any time without notice Target User of the Emulator Product This emulator product should only be used by those who have carefully read and thoroughly understood the information and restrictions contained in the user s manual Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism It is highly recommended that first time users be instructed by users that are well versed in the operation of the emulator product Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page of VIII RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 LIMITED WARRANTY
213. ld not be accessed for at least one cycle This address will be reinitialized whenever the reset pin is activated goes low In such cases write the value H 35 to the same address again after the system has been released from the reset state 3 5 10 External Expanded Mode Restrictions 1 When the frequency of Bd external bus clock is 20 MHz or higher external accesses must be made in 3 or more state cycles 2 While the emulator is operating in the external expanded mode disabling output of B prevents external accesses 3 The emulator starts output of the write data at the rising edge of the T2 cycle The actual MCU however starts output of data at the falling edge of the T1 cycle 3 5 11 Port Function Control Register B PFCRB Note In the actual MCU the initial value of PFCRB is H FF in the emulator however that value is H 00 and P67 to P60 are not input pins for IRQ15 to IRQ8 To use IRQ15 to IRQ8 in the emulator write the value H FF to address H FFFFFBCB Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 29 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 30 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure This section describes the diagnostic test procedure using the E6000H diagnostic program 4 1 System Set Up for Diagnostic Program Execution L 6 To execute the diagnostic program use the foll
214. le during delay executed until the trace has stopped earlier record numbers go forward 1 2 the most recent record Instruction Address Executed instruction address 8 digit hexadecimal Code Instruction code of the address Address Address on the processor bus Data Data in byte word or longword units displayed as 2 digit 4 digit or 8 digit hexadecimal Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 45 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging Variable Label R W SZ Status Area Probes IRQ Timestamp Timestamp Difference Source Label Label information of the address if defined when Data CPU data access cycle is selected in Status Whether access was read RD or write WR Selects the size of an access as B byte W word or L longword Bus status during this cycle DTC operation PROG prefetch Data CPU data access cycle DMAC DMAC cycle or STACK STACK cycle Memory area being accessed ROM on chip ROM RAM on chip RAM I O on chip I O 8 16 or 32 bit EXT external or 8 16 or 32 bit EMU emulation memory A 4 bit binary number showing the four probe pins in the order of Probe 4 Probe 3 Probe 2 and Probe 1 from the left Status of IRQ inputs Time stamp of the record Time stamps start from zero each time the user program is executed The minimum unit used in time measurement depends on the time stamp clock
215. ling OK G A Monitor Function OL RUN weitesig gig des dcdcdc Sas wiocetene e 94 andandnai ew ew wue E ah iaig gudieid ene OK 02 VCCDOWN 222 55 oe ssc oscedcs tee aessaeecee eee eee eee Gees OK 03 NOCLE 2c ccsc eee es cad tee sees DHRRE REESE EEE OR ERE Segre ers OK OA TIMEOUT 2243660 5 5 0 9205 648 45 05 00 REE tod edd eed sreideuduepardeedee OK G A Parallel RAM Monitor DII PRAM CIS at synime eee oe RA RCS ees Oe RU RCE OK 02 DRAN MONT GOE sci ceapaycnsiacs amp Kaan enie or By aye ORNS WERE ENS SES OK G A Trace Function OTY Free TEOG 22 5 5 ams sesigusl enya da Gy hy dod dy aoe LB eR IENGUE amp amp Boe eEaU Seay BREE OF OK 02 Trace SEOD cose s sacassees meee es sicies FoR ES MEGS VE ETE DRG a es OK OS Tame DEA 6 246 502 2255 2S 99 Baissea Er AL EARR OK 04 RESERVED Combination 01 B to A Time Measurement FPGA counter OK 02 B to A Time Measurement G A counter OK 03 D to C Time Measurement G A counter OK Parallel Access 01 02 03 04 Internal ROM Parallel TESE 2 0 4 22866666 6688 eiaeeenein es OK Internal RAM Parallel Test arrr ices Sa EE OES SS rrerarmaardns OK Internal 2 0 Parallel Test c ssscscicseed edie 8a Sse eo ts hea OK Emulation RAM Parallel Test 0000000058 OK Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 64 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Normal
216. llel Test 03 Internal I O Parallel Test 14 H8SX 1527 Register Read Write 01 Register Initial Value Check 02 Register Write VEELEY siciciiiirereeriscese 15 FPGA Parallel RAM Function 01 CHO 256Byte Area Check Byte 02 CHO 256Byte Area Check Word 03 CHO 256Byte Area Check Long Word 04 CH1 CH11 256Byte Area Check Long Word Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 34 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Normal stopped at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Shows the time when diagnostic program execution ended Tests run for xh xmin xs Shows the execution time of the diagnostic program Summary Cow MON DH A WNB Tests performed 1 time s Main Board Access Emulation Board Access Evaluation Board Access Basic Function GO to BREAK Time Measurement Emulation Monitor G A Break Function G A Performance Analysis Function G A Monitor Function G A Parallel RAM Monitor G A Trace Function Combination Parallel Access H8SX 1527 Register Read Write FPGA Parallel RAM Function oo Oooo oOo FO GoGo oo oO eo 6 Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Error s Shows the total number of errors for each test item RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 35 of 44 REJ1
217. llowing hardware do not connect the user system interface board and user system E6000H HS1650EPH60H Host computer The E6000 PC interface board which will be one of the following boards PCI bus interface board HS6000EIC01H or HS6000EIC02H PC card interface HS6000EIPO1H or HS6000EIP02H LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H Install the E6000 PC interface board in the host computer and connect the supplied PC interface cable to the board Connect the PC interface cable to the emulator Connect the supplied AC power cable to the emulator Boot the host computer up and enter the command input wait state of the command prompt Windows 2000 or Windows XP Turn on the E6000H emulator switch Note To execute the diagnostic program firstly turn on the power of the emulator The diagnostic program checks the initial state of the hardware Therefore after turning on the power do not activate the High performance Embedded Workshop before executing the diagnostic program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 59 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 2 Test Item of the Diagnostic Program Table 4 1 shows the test items of this diagnostic program Table 4 1 Test Items of the Diagnostic Program Test No Test Item Description 1 Main Board Access Register test in the E6000H main board 2 Emulation Board Access Register test in the E6000H emulation bo
218. log Box On Emulator Break Page List box Displays the current settings for each of the channels If no setting has been made for a channel only the channel number is displayed here Edit Clicking this button opens the On Emulator Break Channel n dialog box n channel number which allows the user to set a break condition for a selected channel Reset Clears the settings made for the selected channel Reset All Clears the settings made for all of the channels Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 40 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging The user can set more complex break conditions in the On Emulator Break Channel n dialog box by a combination of conditions provided on pages Address Data Bus Area Probe Interrupt and Count On Emulator Break Channel 1 Figure 3 25 On Emulator Break Channel n Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 41 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging Address Sets address conditions Don t Care Selects no address bus condition Address Select this button to set the address bus value specified in Start as the break condition Range A break occurs in the range of the address bus values specified from Start start address to End end address Outside Range Select this option to generate a break with an address bus outside the range set in Range f The address range of a function can be set
219. ls are included in the user resource DTC module the parallel access function may not be available in the following cases depending on the state of the target MCU or the emulator settings e When the DTC module is in the module stop state the parallel access function is not available e When the priority of the DTC is lower than that of the CPU the parallel access function is not available e Inthe software standby mode the parallel access function is not available e When there is a conflict between a parallel access and a reset the parallel access fails e When there is a conflict between a parallel access and an NMI interrupt the parallel access fails Bit 0 and the transfer stop flag ERR of the DTC control register DTCCR are set e When an address error occurs during a parallel access the parallel access fails Bit 0 and the transfer stop flag ERR of the DTC control register DTCCR are set e When Enable DTC parallel access is disabled in the Configuration Properties dialog box the parallel access function is not available e When the profiling function is used the parallel access function during user program execution is not available If a parallel access to read memory fails or a parallel access is attempted under the condition where the parallel access function is not available incorrect memory contents will be displayed If a parallel access to write to memory fails incorrect values will be written to If the mes
220. m the Debug menu or click the Step Over button on the toolbar Figure 4 26 Step Over Button void main void while 1 000102a tutorial 000102e void tutorial void long j int i erase Semple p_sam EE E 0001032 P_sam new Sample 0001050 for i 0 i lt 10 i wy xS 0001044 if j lt 0 ERS FFB400 long 10 0001046 Ges alle 0 H 0000794b FFB400 long 0001048 ali j R 1 H 000059e2 FFB404 long R 2 H 0000446b FFB408 long 0001058 e p_sam gt sort a R 3 H O0004ic6 FFB40c long 0001066 p_sam gt change a R 4 H OOO03 54 FFB410 ilong 000106e gt p_sem gt s0 a 0 R 5 H 00002781 FFB414 long 0001072 p_sam gt s1 a 1 6 H O0001cfb FFB418 long 0001076 p_sam gt s2 a 2 R 7 H 0000167e FFB41C long ee Pee aa R 8 H O00015fb FFB420 long e p_sam gt s a 5 0001086 p_sam gt s5 a 5 9 H OOOOOff6 FFB424 long 000108e p_sam gt s6 a 6 i H b400 R2 lint 0001096 p_sam gt s7 a 7 000109e p_sam gt s8 a 8 0001086 p_sam gt s9 a 9 00010ae Gelete p_sam Ta watchs Kwacha wach A wacha hd H 2 Figure 4 27 High performance Embedded Workshop Window Step Over The data of variable a displayed in the Watch window is sorted in the descending order Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 103 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 14 Forced Breaking of
221. mily H8S H8 300 7 Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Properties Figure 2 7 New Project Workspace Dialog Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 7 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the workspace name it needs not be entered Directory edit box Enter the directory name in which the workspace will be created Click the Browse button to select a directory CPU family combo box Select the target CPU family Tool chain combo box Select the target toolchain name when using the toolchain Otherwise select None Project type list box Select the project type to be used Note When Demonstration is selected in the emulator note the followings The Demonstration is a program for the simulator attached to the H8S H8 300 compiler package or the SuperH RISC engine C C compiler package To use the generated source file delete the printf statement in the source file 3 Make the required setting for the toolchain When the setting has been completed the following dialog box is displayed xd Figure 2 8 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box The target platform for the session file used when the High performance Embedded Workshop is activated must be selected here Check the b
222. mulation was started with normal program execution i e they are invalid when emulation was started with step execution The input of the RES or NMI signal during execution or step execution can be disabled by a setting in the Configuration dialog box 3 4 5 Watchdog Timer WDT When emulation is suspended i e by a break counting up by the WDT timer counter TCNT is also suspended Counting resumes when emulation is resumed user mode During break mode a prescaler which supplies a clock to TCNT operates continuously Since the prescaler might be in different phases before and after emulation goes through a period in the break mode a break can change the period before the WDT overflows by 1 cycle of the prescaler s clock 3 4 6 A D Converter As well as analog input pins the A D converter has AVcc AVss and ADTRG pins As the A D converter operates with an independent power supply connect AVcc the power supply pin to the A D power supply on the user system Notes 1 When the A D converter is not in use connect AVcc to Vcc 2 As there are user system interface cable compression circuits for compression at the ratio of 5 3 3 wiring on the printed circuit board and protective circuits are connected between the user system and the MCU on the evaluation chip board the precision of conversion is lower than that of the actual MCU Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 25 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Har
223. n 28 2009 Page 4 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use Workspace Name edit box Enter the new workspace name Project Name edit box Enter the project name When the project name is the same as the workspace name it needs not be entered Directory edit box Enter the directory name in which the workspace will be created Click the Browse button to select a directory CPU family combo box Select the target CPU family Other list boxes are used for setting the toolchain the fixed information is displayed when the toolchain has not been installed Click the OK button 3 Select the target platform of the session file The following dialog box is displayed Figure 2 4 New Project Step 7 Dialog Box The target platform for the session file used when the High performance Embedded Workshop is activated must be selected here Check the box against the target platform and then click the Next button Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 5 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of High performance Embedded Workshop except for the emulator Target name Configuration name Debue_yyyy_E6000H_E mulator_GP r Detail options Value Modify Figure 2 5 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box If multiple target platform
224. n for the window Radix Hexadecimal 16 Uses a hexadecimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Decimal E Uses a decimal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Octal Uses an octal for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Binary gt Uses a binary for displaying a radix in which the numerical values will be displayed and entered by default Emu System lator z Opens the Configuration Properties dialog box allowing the user to modify the emulator settings Memory Resource E Opens the Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to view and edit the emulator s current memory map RTOS Support Function Opens the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box allowing the user to make settings for debugging of RTOS tasks Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 160 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Appendix B Command Lines Appendix B Command Lines Table B 1 lists the High performance Embedded Workshop commands Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 161 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Appendix B Command Lines Table B 1 No Command Name High performance Embedded Workshop Commands Abbreviation Function
225. n the H8SX 1600 series MCU has sleep software standby and hardware standby modes 1 Sleep and Software Standby Modes e Break The MCU can be taken out of the sleep and software standby modes either in the normal ways or through satisfaction of a break condition forced break When restarting after a break the user program will restart at the instruction following the SLEEP instruction e Trace Trace information is not acquired in these modes e Memory access with emulator functions For information on displaying and modifying the contents of memory in the sleep and software standby modes refer to section 5 4 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory in the Debugger Part 3 4 3 Interrupts During execution and step execution the user can interrupt the H8SX 1600 series MCU Interrupt sources are retained while emulation is halted break mode In such cases interrupt processing commences immediately after emulation is restarted Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 53 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 4 Control Input Signals RES NMI BREQ WAIT and STBY The H8SX 1600 series MCU control input signals are RES NMI BREQ WAIT and STBY The RES NMI and STBY signals are only valid when emulation was started with normal program execution i e they are invalid when emulation was started with step execution The BREQ and WAIT signals are valid during emulation with the displ
226. n Using the HI1000 4 Debugging Extension When using the HI1000 4 debugging extension select Don t Care under RTOS Support Function in the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box to disable the RTOS extension function Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 150 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 12 Input Format 5 12 1 Entering Masks Address bus conditions and data bus conditions can be input with masks Addresses can be masked in 1 3 or 4 bit units When a bit is masked it always satisfies the condition To specify a mask for an address bus condition specify the mask value in the Mask area The mask for data conditions is similarly specified in the Mask area To specify any further mask specify 1 for the digits to be ignored Examples of mask specification are listed below Table 5 7 Address Mask Specification No Input Value Mask Unit Example Masked Bits Binary 1 bit B 00000111 Masks bits 0 to 2 Octal 3 bits 0 000017 Masks bits 0 to 3 and 5 Hexadecimal 4 bits H 07FF Masks bits 0 to 10 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 151 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 152 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 6 Error Messages Section 6 Error Messages 6 1 Error Messages of the Emulator 6 1 1 Error Messages at Emulator
227. n before Use Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 Description on Emulator Usage This section describes the preparation before emulator usage Figure 2 1 is a flowchart on preparation before use of the emulator CAUTION Read this section and understand its contents before preparation Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Connect the emulator Described in this section I Set up the emulator on each OS See the E6000H emulator setup guide Start debugging See the Debugger Part Figure 2 1 Emulator Preparation Flowchart Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 9 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 4 2 2 Emulator Connection he following description covers connection of the emulator 1 Connecting the Emulator to the User System A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 2 2 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the right side of the E6000H station s front panel is not lit Remove the AC power cable of the E6000H station from the outlet if the cable is connect
228. n chip ROM RAM area the on chip ROM RAM area in the MCU installed in the emulator is accessed To break user program execution when the on chip ROM RAM area is written to or accessed use the hardware break or internal break 3 4 2 Power Down Modes Sleep and Software Standby For reduced power consumption the MCU has sleep and software standby modes 1 Sleep and Software Standby Modes e Break The MCU can be taken out of the sleep and software standby modes either in the normal ways or through satisfaction of a break condition forced break When restarting after a break the user program will restart at the instruction following the SLEEP instruction e Trace Trace information is not acquired in these modes e Memory access with emulator functions For information on displaying and modifying the contents of memory in the sleep and software standby modes refer to section 5 4 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory in the Debugger Part 3 4 3 Interrupts During execution and step execution the user can interrupt the MCU Interrupt sources are retained while emulation is halted break mode In such cases interrupt processing commences immediately after emulation is restarted Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 24 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 4 Control Input Signals RES and NMI The MCU control input signals are RES and NMI The RES and NMI signals are only valid when e
229. nd in the user system ground the frame to the same outlet as the 100 V to 240 V AC power supply of the emulator station figure 2 5 so that the ground potentials become even Signal line E6000H station Evaluation i User system Power supply 7 Signal ground Frame ground Ground Figure 2 4 Connecting the System Ground AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 15 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use The user system must be connected to an appropriate ground so as to minimize noise and the adverse effects of ground loops When connecting the emulator s front end unit and the user system confirm that the ground pins of the front end unit are firmly connected to the user system s ground Emulator power User system supply cable power supply cable Outlet Ground 100 V to 240 V AC power Figure 2 5 Connecting the Frame Ground 2 2 7 PC Interface Board Specifications For details on the PC interface board LAN adapter or USB adapter refer to their description notes Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 16 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Sp
230. nd satisfaction count can be set The on chip breakpoint can be set even in the ROM area or flash memory area on the user system It is also possible to set a sequential breakpoint consisted of several on chip breakpoints The user can set an on chip breakpoint in the Editor or Disassembly window On emulator breakpoints On emulator break functions are implemented by dedicated hardware in the E6000H station Conditions on the address bus data bus bus area external probe signals external interrupt signals and satisfaction count can be set The on emulator breakpoint can be set even in the ROM area or flash memory area on the user system As the emulator hardware provides this function several cycles may be required until a break occurs after satisfaction of a condition Software on chip and on emulator breakpoints can be set in the Event window Select View gt Code gt Eventpoints or click the Eventpoints toolbar button m to open the Event window Event MEK Ay software On Chip A On Emulator 7 Figure 3 19 Event Window The Event window has the following three sheets Software sheet Displays the settings made for software breakpoints It is also possible to set modify and cancel software breakpoints On Chip sheet Displays or sets on chip breakpoints On Emulator sheet Displays or sets on emulator breakpoints Note For notes on event points refer o section 5 6 Even
231. ndlings for settings other than software breakpoints on chip breakpoints and on emulator breakpoints are common 3 7 5 Modifying Event Points Select an event point to be modified and choose Edit from the popup menu to open the dialog box that corresponds the event which allows the user to modify the event conditions The Edit menu is only available when one event point is selected 3 7 6 Enabling an Event Point Select an event point and choose Enable from the popup menu to enable the selected event point 3 7 7 Disabling an Event Point Select an event point and choose Disable from the popup menu to disable the selected event point When an event point is disabled the event point will remain in the list but an event will not occur when the specified conditions have been satisfied Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 43 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 7 8 Deleting an Event Point Select an event point and choose Delete from the popup menu to remove the selected event point To retain the event point but not have it cause an event when its conditions are met use the Disable option see section 3 15 7 Disabling an Event Point 3 7 9 Deleting All Event Points Choose Delete All from the popup menu to remove all event points 3 7 10 Viewing the Source Line for an Event Point Select an event point and choose Go to Source from the popup menu to open the Editor or Disassembly window
232. ndow Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 95 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 11 Watching Variables As the user steps through a program it is possible to watch that the values of variables used in the user program are changed For example set a watch on the long type array a declared at the beginning of the program by the following procedure e Click the left of displayed array a in the Editor window to place the cursor e Select Instant Watch with the right hand mouse button The following dialog box will be displayed Figure 4 16 Instant Watch Dialog Box e Click the Add button to add a variable to the Watch window FFB400 long 10 A h watchs A watcha Watcha A watcha Figure 4 17 Watch Window Displaying the Array Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 96 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial The user can also add a variable to the Watch window by specifying its name e Click the Watch window with the right hand mouse button and select Add Watch from the popup menu The following dialog box will be displayed Figure 4 18 Add Watch Dialog Box e Enter variable i to Variable or expression edit box and click the OK button The Watch window will now also show the int type variable i E FFB400 ilong 10 i H 000a R2 int Tp watchs watche watchs watcha F
233. necting the Emulator Click the Connect toolbar button from Debug to connect the emulator 6 S eae AEAEE Figure 4 3 Connecting the Emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 85 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 4 Downloading the Tutorial Program 4 4 1 Downloading the Tutorial Program Download the object program to be debugged e Select Download module from Tutorial abs of Download modules Tutorial 5j es Tutorial 3 6 C source file dbsct c A sbtk c C source file E resetprg cpp sort cpp tutorial cpp 5 Download modules idiss E Dependencie ownload module sbrk h Download module debug data only sort h Unload module stacksct Configure View Allow Docking Hide Figure 4 4 Downloading the Tutorial Program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 86 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 4 2 Displaying the Source Program The High performance Embedded Workshop allows the user to debug a user program at the source level e Double click Tutorial cpp under C source file xi E G Tutorial Tutorial B C source file f DBSCT C SBRK C E C source file RESETPRG CPP l SORT CPP SEEN E Download modules E Tutorial abs E Dependencies D Eala 000102a 000102e
234. nication Yes Yes unit I O port Yes Yes H UDI user debugging interface Not available Not available Note The user cannot use the H UDI because it is being used by the emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 26 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 8 Differences in Values of Registers Note that certain general and control registers of both emulators are initialized whenever the system is activated or the MCU is reset by a command Table 3 5 Initial Values of Registers in the MCU and the Emulator Emulator MCU Register Name Power On Reset Reset CPU Power On Reset PC PC value indicated by PC value indicated by Undefined the power on reset the power on reset vector vector ERO to ER7 H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined CCR B 1XXXXXXX B 1XXXXXXX B 1XXXXXXX EXR B o1111111 Value before the reset B o1111111 MACH H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined MACL H 00000000 Value before the reset Undefined VBR H 00000000 Value before the reset H 00000000 SBR H FFFFFFOO Value before the reset H FFFFFFOO Note X indicates an undefined bit 3 4 9 Differences in Access to the Internal RAM In the H8SX 1527 E6000H and H8SX 1527R E6000H emulators writing to the internal RAM takes one cycle by default To make the emulator write data to the RAM in two cycles the user program must write the value H 35 to address H FFFFFD97 before
235. nits of 52 us 1 6us Time stamping is in minimum time units of 1 6 ps 20ns Time stamping is in minimum time units of 20 ns Clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with the cycles of the system clock signal 6 Clock 2 Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 2 cycle of the system clock signal Clock 4 Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 4 cycle of the system clock signal Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 50 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging Clock 8 Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 8 cycle of the system clock signal Selection of the trace contents Selects whether or not to display time stamps IRQs or executed instructions Detailed time stamp Acquires 32 bit time stamp information No IRQ or executed instruction is displayed Execute code Irq Displays IRQs and executed instructions Lower 16 bits of time stamps are fixed to 0 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 51 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 Trace Acquisition Condition Channel n dialog box Use this dialog box to set pass points and a reset point for a sequential trace stop and conditions in the address range trace address range conditional trace conditional trace Point to Poi
236. nnect or click the Connect toolbar button to re connect the emulator Note When re connecting the emulator the load module must be registered to the High performance Embedded Workshop beforehand 2 4 Ending the Emulator The emulator can be exited by using the following two methods a Canceling the connection of the emulator being activated Select Debug gt Disconnect or click on the Disconnect toolbar button b Exiting the High performance Embedded Workshop 1 Select File gt Exit 2 A message box is displayed If necessary click the Yes button to save a session After saving a session the High performance Embedded Workshop exits High perfo ce Em sho xj A Session Session XXXX_XXXX_xxxx_ Emulator has been modified do you want to save it No Cancel Figure 2 13 Session has been modified Message Box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 12 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging Section 3 Debugging This section describes the debugging operations and their related windows and dialog boxes 3 1 Setting the Environment for Emulation The method for setting the environment for emulation is described here This environment must be set correctly before debugging is started 3 1 1 Opening the Configuration Properties Dialog Box Selecting Setup gt Emulator gt System or clicking the Emulator System toolbar button EA opens the Configuration Proper
237. nnel 1 dialog box 5 Items that have been set are displayed in the list box on the Condition page of the Trace Acquisition Properties dialog box Click the Close button on this dialog box 6 Set a software breakpoint at the address on the line that has delete p_sam within the tutorial function H 000010AE in this example for details refer to section 4 16 1 Software Break Function 7 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu Execution stops when the break condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the following contents Cnn 2 SA SSE um PIR Instruction ddress Code Address VarisbleLabel Data Rju SZ Status Area TASK Probes IPQ Timestamp 00012 cottheos _a 000015fb RD L DATA INRAM 1111 1 C000R00dmin000s00 mes 64us3Z0ns 00011 OOffbt00 a OOCOOffE WR L DATA INPAM uu 1 Ores n000s00 Tms864us320n3 00010 00002004 09667926 PD L PROS EMY 16 uu i Omi n000200 00009 0000208 m b me mee nat 1 Ormi n000300 Ter 00008 COrt400 a OO000ff6 RD L DATA IMRAN TEN 1 0000000min000s00 Tms 64us320ns 0000 00007 e RD s rme mme 31i 1 000000 winO00800we1 7T5un040ne 0000 00006 CO0OOff RD L DATA INBAM 1111 1 OO00WOO0min000s00 ms17us040ns 0000 00005 L DATA Eog 00004 L M 3 00003 b EA 00002 L TAK 00003 i a1 Figure 4 47 Trace Window Conditional Trace Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 119 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 4 17 4 Statistics The number
238. nt trace execution time measurement and a trigger output Ux Interrupt Count Delay Action Address Data Bus Area Probe m After Condition Match Porio Bange Trace r Fy with the next Acquisition Condition C None Address m Output Trigger J Enable output trigger m TASK ID ction 1 Static C TASK Selection2 Static TASK Selection 3 Static Figure 3 29 Trace Acquisition Condition Channel n Dialog Box The Trace Acquisition Condition Channel n dialog box has pages Action Address Data Bus Area Probe Interrupt Count and Delay The user can make more complex settings by a combination of conditions provided on these pages Action After Condition Match Selects an action to take when a condition is satisfied Trace Stop Selects a trace stop Address Range Trace Selects an address range trace Selecting this option and checking Combination with the next channel allows an address range conditional trace Acquisition Condition Selects a conditional trace Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 52 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging None Select this option if you do not want to take any of the actions listed above This is useful for a trigger output or execution time measurement Address Sets the start and end addresses of the range in the address range trace address range conditiona
239. nted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document
240. o do something Components Check all the components described in the component list unpacking If the components are not complete contact a Renesas sales office Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page II of X REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Contents Prelic TIE e E AAA EEEE ER E E E A E I H8SX 1650 Hardware Part vevcsccccccccesscissececccsssssecescsesasacsctevstecsvesssdetavavabeesetescsvccevstessscecssteosvacedestsdeveets 1 Section 1 Overview 1 1 Notes on Usage 1 2 Emulator Hardware Components 1 2 1 E6000H Station Components A Part of Photos may be Different from Real Appearances 1 2 2 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration 1 3 System Configuration 1 3 1 System Configuration Using Various Interfaces Section 2 Preparation before Uses iccsssis ianssesssscsacited sent stensdssvsiscseuhavts ieausdusnlutbasonsavoncteotessus cored sevessoseee 2 1 Description on Emulator Usage 2 2 Emulator Connection 2 2 1 Connecting the Emulator to the User System 2 2 2 Connecting the User System Interface Board 2 2 3 Connection by the User System Interface Connectors 2 2 4 Arrangement on the User System Interface Connector 2 2 5 Precautions on Connecting the User System 2 2 6 Connecting the External Probe Not Supported in this Emulator 2 2 7 Selecting the Clock 2 2 8 Connecting the System Ground 2 2 9 PC Interface Board Specifications Section 3 Hardware Specifications cccccccscesssssssseesscessssssc
241. oard option PCI bus or PC card bus Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the interface board in the host computer and connect the interface cable supplied with the PC interface board to the emulator Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the PC interface board in the host computer g PC interface board PC interface cable E6000H emulator PCIF S Host computer Figure 1 5 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board 2 LAN Adapter Figure 1 6 shows the configuration of a system in which the LAN adapter is used A LAN adapter can be used to connect the emulator to a host computer as a network Network E6000H emulator PCIF L S iiai Host computer PC interface cable Figure 1 6 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 6 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 3 USB Adapter Figure 1 7 shows the configuration of a system in which the USB adapter is used A USB adapter can be used to connect the emulator to a host computer with the USB interface E6000H emulator L SEEE Host computer USB cable PC interface cable Figure 1 7 System Configuration Using a USB Adapter Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 7 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 8 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparatio
242. obe direction and connect the external probe to the emulator station correctly Incorrect connection will damage the probe or connector When an external probe is connected to the external probe connector on the emulator s front end unit it enables external signal tracing and multibreak detection Figure 2 2 shows the external probe connector External probe External HS 1544EPH60H probe PCN2 RENESAS connector Pin No Probe Name _ Signal Name Note 1 1 Probe input 0 Synchronous break 2 2 Probe input 1 input pin 3 3 Probe input 2 4 4 Probe input 3 5 G GND GND connection pin 6 TUV Trigger output Trigger mode output pin 7 G GND GND connection pin 8 T5V RUN or break High level output at RUNSTEP output Figure 2 2 External Probe Connector Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 12 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 5 Selecting the Clock This emulator supports three types of clock for the MCU a crystal oscillator attached on the emulator s front end unit external clock input from the user system and the emulator internal clock The clock is specified with the Configuration dialog box This emulator can use a clock source b running at up to 40 0 MHz as the H8SX 1544 clock input CLOCK command Xtal Crystal oscillator 4 to 9 MHz Target External clock 4 to 9 MHz 4 Emulator internal clock 4 MHz 5 Emulator internal clock
243. of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging External 32bit Selects an external area with the 32 bit width where no emulation memory is allocated as the condition External 16bit Selects an external area with the16 bit width where no emulation memory is allocated as the condition External 8bit Selects an external area with the 8 bit width where no emulation memory is allocated as the condition Emulator 32bit Selects an external area with the 32 bit width where emulation memory is allocated as the condition Emulator 16bit Selects an external area with the 16 bit width where emulation memory is allocated as the condition Emulator 8bit Selects an external area with the 8 bit width where emulation memory is allocated as the condition Read Write Sets read write conditions When Don t Care has been selected no read write condition can be set Probe Sets the levels high or low of the external probe signals PRB1 to PRB4 as the condition When Don t Care has been selected the level of the selected probe signal cannot be set as the condition Interrupt Sets the levels high or low of the IRQ signals as the condition When Don t Care has been selected the level of the IRQ signal cannot be set as the condition Count Sets a satisfaction count condition When Don t Care has been selected the satisfaction count is defined as 1 3 7 4 Editing Event Points Ha
244. office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions un
245. ons Start Range To End Range Measurement Measures the execution time from a specified range to another specified range Measurement of execution time spent from calling of any of sequential subroutines to calling of any of other sequential subroutines in a program that includes subroutines in sequence such as an assembly program Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement Measures the number of times a specified range is accessed from another specified range Measurement of the number of times a global variable is accessed from a specific function Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement Measures the number of times a specified range has called another specified range Measurement of the number of times a function is called from a specific function Use eight performance channels installed on the circuit for measurement of hardware performance in the emulator for setting of conditions for measurement Up to eight points can be set Note however that up to four points can be set in Start Range To End Range Measurement Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement or Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement because two sequential points are used for setting a condition in these modes Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 63 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging Table 3 2 Mode Settings for Measurement Point Measurement Mode z 3 7 3 e 7 8 Time Of Specifie
246. or PCI bus and PC card bus specifications the LAN adapter and the USB adapter refer to the relevant descriptive documents 1 3 1 System Configuration Using Various Interfaces 1 PC Interface Board Figure 1 5 shows the configuration of a system in which the PC interface board is used The emulator can be connected to a host computer via a PC interface board option PCI bus or PC card bus Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the interface board in the host computer and connect the interface cable supplied with the PC interface board to the emulator Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the PC interface board in the host computer Bj PC interface board E6000H B 4 emulator PC interface cable a ror f AS Host computer Figure 1 5 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board 2 LAN Adapter Figure 1 6 shows the configuration of a system in which the LAN adapter is used A LAN adapter can be used to connect the emulator to a host computer as a network Network E6000H emulator co PCIF L AS Rad Host computer PC interface cable Figure 1 6 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 6 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 3 USB Adapter Figure 1 7 shows the configuration of a system in which the USB adapter is used A USB adapter can be used to connect the emulator to a ho
247. ore the module is used Peripheral modules in the H8SX 1527 E6000H SSU HCAN and RTIP Peripheral modules in the H8SX 1527R E6000H SSU RCAN and RTIP 4 Restriction on the SSU Module Stop Function If the SSU module stop function is used the emulator can independently change the module stop bit for each channel to take it out of the module stopped state and make the channel accessible Setting the module stop bit for an SSU channel to 1 independently makes that SSU channel inaccessible To initialize the SSU channels however note that all three module stop bits i e MSTPC8 MSTPC9 and MSTPC10 must be set to 1 For details on the SSU module stop function of the MCU refer to the hardware manual Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 28 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure This section describes the diagnostic test procedure using the E6000H diagnostic program 4 1 System Set Up for Diagnostic Program Execution 1 To execute the diagnostic program use the following hardware do not connect the user system interface board and user system E6000H HS1527KEPH60H or HS1527REPH60H Host computer The E6000 PC interface board which will be one of the following boards PCI bus interface board HS6000EIC01H or HS6000EIC02H PC card interface AS6000EIP01H or HS6000EIP02H LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H Install the E6000 PC inter
248. ormance Embedded Workshop re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail Emulation Board not Support XX XX XX Emulator is switched off or not connected The emulator power is not turned on or the user system interface cable is not connected Exit the High performance Embedded Workshop re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail EVA chip Board not Support XX XX XX Emulator is switched off or not connected The emulator power is not turned on or the user system interface cable is not connected Exit the High performance Embedded Workshop re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and describe the error occurrence in detail Can t initialize G A registers An error occurred during the initialization of the emulator Exit the High performance Embedded Workshop re connect the user system interface cable turn on the power of the emulator and re initiate the High performance Embedded Workshop If the problem is not solved contact us and des
249. other than those specified in RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties as a condition select OTHER here 3 12 5 Event Point On Emulator Breakpoint When selecting TASK Selection the condition is changed as follows Address page in the On Emulator Break Channel n dialog box Address Sets the address bus condition Outside Range Outside Range is disabled TASK ID TASK ID is added to the Address page The TASK Selection 1 to TASK Selection 3 settings in the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box are selectable as conditions To set values other than those specified in RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties as a condition select OTHER here Note For values set for the RTOS extension function refer to section 5 11 RTOS Extension Function Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 82 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial Section 4 Tutorial 4 1 Introduction This section describes the main functions of the emulator by using a tutorial program The tutorial program is based on the C program that sorts ten random data items in ascending or descending order The tutorial program performs the following actions e The main function repeatedly calls the tutorial function to repeat sorting e The tutorial function generates random data to be sorted and calls the sort and change functions in that order e The sort function enters the array where the random data g
250. ouble click the S W Breakpoints column in the sort function and set a software breakpoint Bala 11 12 13 14 15 16 abt 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 4q 45 46 47 0002000 0002010 0002014 0002018 000201c 0002020 0002026 o0020ze 0002032 0002038 000203e 0002046 0002050 0002 0ac 00020a4 000209 0002072 0002094 0002098 00020b2 Sample Sample s0 0 s1 0 32 0 s3 0 s4 0 s5 0 s6 0 s7 0 s8 0 39 0 void Sample sort long a long t int i j K gap gap 5 while gap gt 0 for k O k lt gap k for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap for j i gap j gt k j j gap if a j gt a j gap E elj a j a j gap a j gap t else break gap gap 2 Ta SORT CPP Figure 4 54 Editor Window Software Breakpoint Setting Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 125 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial e Select Reset Go from the Debug menu e After the break in program execution select Stack Trace from the Code submenu of the View menu to open the Stack Trace window Value F Sample sort long 00209 Kind Name F tutorial 001066 F main 00102 F PowerON_ Reset O0041 Figure 4 55 Stack Trace Window Figure 4 55 shows that the position of the program coun
251. owing hardware do not connect the user system interface board and user system E6000H HS1544EPH60H Host computer The E6000 PC interface board which will be one of the following boards PCI bus interface board HS6000EIC01H or HS6000EIC02H PC card interface HS6000EIPO1H or HS6000EIP02H LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H Install the E6000 PC interface board in the host computer and connect the supplied PC interface cable to the board Connect the PC interface cable to the emulator Connect the supplied AC power cable to the emulator Boot the host computer up and enter the command input wait state of the command prompt Windows 2000 or Windows XP Turn on the E6000H emulator switch Note To execute the diagnostic program firstly turn on the power of the emulator The diagnostic program checks the initial state of the hardware Therefore after turning on the power do not activate the High performance Embedded Workshop before executing the diagnostic program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 31 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 2 Test Item of the Diagnostic Program Table 4 1 shows the test items of this diagnostic program Table 4 1 Test Items of the Diagnostic Program Test No Test Item Description 1 Main Board Access Register test in the E6000H main board 2 Emulation Board Access Register
252. ox against the target platform and then click the Next button Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 8 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 4 Set the configuration file name The configuration file saves the state of High performance Embedded Workshop except for the emulator Target name Configuration name Debue_yyyy_E6000H_Emulator_CP m Detail options Value Modify Figure 2 9 New Project Step 8 Dialog Box If multiple target platforms were selected in the New Project Step 7 dialog box shown in figure 2 9 set the configuration file name for each of them each time clicking the Next button to proceed to the next target Setting of the configuration file name is the end of the emulator settings Complete the creation of a new workspace according to the instructions on the screen This activates the High performance Embedded Workshop 5 After the High performance Embedded Workshop has been activated connect the emulator However it is not necessary to connect the emulator immediately after the High performance Embedded Workshop has been activated Select either of the following two ways to connect the emulator connecting the emulator after the setting at emulator activation or without the setting at emulator activation For details on the connection of the emulator refer to section 2 2 Connecting the Emulator Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 9
253. p up menu The Editor window is displayed Enik 000102e void tutorial void long J int i class Sample p sam 0001032 p_sam new Sample 0001050 for i O i lt 10 i 000103 j rand j 0001044 if j lt 0 i 0001046 lee 0001048 gt ali j 0001058 p_sam gt sort a 0001066 p_sam gt change a 000106e p_sam gt sO0 a 0 0001072 p_sam gt sl a 1 0001076 p_sam gt s2 a 2 gt gt Figure 3 6 Editor Window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 19 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging In this window the following items are shown on the left as information on lines 1st column Line Number column A line number for the source file 2nd column Source Address column Address information for the source line 3rd column On Chip Break column On chip breaks 4th column S W Breakpoints column PC bookmark and breakpoint information The text area is displayed in the right part of the Editor window Line Number column This column displays the line number for the source file Source Address column When a program is downloaded an address for the current source file is displayed on the Source address column These addresses are helpful when setting the PC value or a breakpoint On Chip Break column The On Chip Break column displays the following items On chip break channel 1 On chip break channel 2 8 On chip break channel 3 8
254. pplication circuit examples 3 You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military use When exporting the products or technology described herein you should follow the applicable export control laws and regulations and procedures required by such laws and regulations 4 Allinformation included in this document such as product data diagrams charts programs algorithms and application circuit examples is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this document please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed through our website http Awww renesas com 5 Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document but Renesas assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information included in this document 6 When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document you should evaluate the information in light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the int
255. r program in the Disassembly window you may wish to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Select Set Address from the popup menu and the dialog box shown in figure 3 10 is displayed Address min xa Cancel Figure 3 10 Set Address Dialog Box Enter the address in the Address edit box and either click on the OK button or press the Enter key A label name can also be specified as the address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function 3 2 6 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address Wherever you can enter an address or value into the High performance Embedded Workshop you can also enter an expression If you enter a register name prefixed by the hash character the contents of that register will be used as the value in the expression Therefore if you enter the expression pc in the Set Address dialog box the Editor or Disassembly window will display the current PC address It allows the offset of the current PC to be displayed by entering an expression with the PC register plus an offset e g PC 0x100 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 23 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 3 Viewing the Current Status Choose View gt CPU gt Status or click the View Status toolbar button to op
256. r system include the level shifter circuits for 5 V and 3 3 V and resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware compensating for FANIN FANOUT and propagation delays The user system interface circuits connected to the user system are shown in figure 3 2 The delay time is generated on the timing of the RES NMI and _STBY signals when they are input to the MCU from the user system as shown in table 3 2 because this connection for those signals is via logic circuit on the emulator s front end unit Table 3 2 Delay Time for Signal Connected via the Emulator s Front end Unit Signal Name Delay Time ns _RES 21 _NMI 21 _STBY 21 MCU User system interface cable MD control Monitor circuit circuit LVT16244 VHC244 4 7 KQ MDO MD1 MD2 VHC244 EPM7256 VHC14 VHC244 4 7 KQ _RES _NMI _STBY Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 1 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 19 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications MCU 3 3 V M1 NC VHC244 EPM7256 User system interface cable Voltage follower circuit L Vss 1 NC Ve NC EMLE Vcc LPT244 VHC244 4 7 KQ EXTAL NC XTAL Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 2 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 20 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications
257. race window is displayed by default Specifies the second pointer to measure the difference Displays the results of calculation Calculates the difference between the specified two points and display its result in the Timestamp Difference list Clears all the results in the Timestamp Difference list Closes the dialog box All the results in the Timestamp Difference list are cleared Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 60 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 8 13 Analyzing Statistical Information Choose Statistic from the popup menu to open the Statistic dialog box and analyze statistical information under the specified conditions i Result End l Clear Result Statistic Analysis Default Range Item Start End Set New Result Clear Close Figure 3 33 Statistic Dialog Box Setting required for analysis of statistical information Sets a single input value or character string Sets the input value or character string as a range Sets the item for analysis Sets the input value or character string To set a range the start value must be specified here Specify the end value if a range has been set only available when Range has been selected Adds a new condition to the current one Creates a new condition Obtains the result of statistical information analysis Clears all conditions and results of statisti
258. ral Instructiondddress Data Address Raw Tl Don t care other pages Enable Filter J Not designation Trace display range Start PTR End PTR Cancel Apply Figure 3 31 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page To open the Trace Filter dialog box select Filter from the popup menu The Trace Filter dialog box has the following pages General Sets the range for filtering Don t care other pages Only selects the cycle number when this box is checked Other options become invalid Enable Filter Enables the filter when this box is checked No Filters information that does not match the conditions set in those pages when this box is checked Start PTR Enter a PTR value to start filtering End PTR Enter a PTR value to end filtering Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 57 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging InstructionAddress Data Address Area Don t care Value Point Range From To Don t care Setting Point Range From To Don t care Setting Point Range From To Don t care Setting Don t care Setting Set an instruction address condition Detects no address when this box is checked Detects the specified instruction address Enter an address value Enter a single value as an instruction address Specify an instruction address range Enter a single
259. ram Execution 4 2 Test Item of the Diagnostic Program oireeni an O A E S EN EA EAS AAT Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page V of X RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 4 3 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program 4 4 Repair Request Sheet DeBus er Paftor ei erare TEREE AEA E A e e T NE ETE UE 1 Section l OyerviW siseiteiiciieiscsersecedisssciiccessoaatiatecasssstzcessdeeatsansesessdoodeaienceaseassitededetsitascnessssssaenteviceats 1 Section2 Preparation before Use 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Section3 Debugging 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3T Method for Activating High performance Embedded Workshop 2 1 1 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Not Used 2 1 2 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Used 2 1 3 Selecting an Existing Workspace Connecting the Emulator Re connecting the Emulator Ending the Emulator Setting the Environment for Emulation 3 1 1 Opening the Configuration Properties Dialog Box 3 1 2 Customizing the Settings for the Target MCU 3 1 3 Selecting the Interface to be Connected 3 1 4 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box 3 1 5 Changing the Memory Map Setting Downloading a Program 3 2 1 Downloading a Program 3 2 2 Viewing the Source Code 3 2 3 Viewing the Assembly Language Code 3 2 4 Modifying the Assembly Language Code 3 2 5 Viewing a Specific Address 3 2 6 Viewing the Current Program Counter Address
260. ram is running Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 3 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview Rear Panel a b Figure 1 3 E6000H Station Rear Panel a Power switch Turning this switch to I input supplies power to the emulator E6000H station and the E6000H s front end unit b AC power connector For an AC 100 V to 240 V power supply c PC interface cable connector For the PC interface cable that connects the host computer to the E6000H station A PC interface board PC card interface LAN adapter or USB adapter can be connected Marked PC IF Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 4 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 2 2 Front end Unit Configuration The names of the components on the front end unit are listed below m vow 124 b ra HS1544EPH60H Co roe RENESAS NL s 162 8 43 6 30 6 125 18 5 5 Figure 1 4 Configuration and Dimensions of the Emulator s Front end Unit a Crystal oscillator terminals For installing a crystal oscillator to be used as an external clock source for the MCU b External probe connector For connecting the external probe for external signal tracing and multibreak detection c User system
261. rate selected in the Trace Acquisition dialog box Difference from the timestamp value shown on the previous line Source program of the executed instruction address Label information of the address if defined It is possible to hide any column not necessary in the Trace window Selecting a column you want to hide from the popup menu displayed by clicking the right hand mouse button on the header column hides that column To display the hidden column select the column from the said popup menu again Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 46 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 8 3 Specifying Trace Acquisition Conditions The capacity of the trace buffer is limited When the buffer becomes full the oldest trace information is overwritten Setting the trace acquisition condition allows acquisition of useful trace information and effective use of the trace buffer There are the following types of trace acquisition conditions Free trace Acquires trace information continuously from the start of the user program execution to the occurrence of a break only when no trace acquisition condition is set Sequential trace stop Specifies the order of trace acquisition conditions to be satisfied and stops trace acquisition when all of the conditions are satisfied It is possible to set up to seven pass points and one reset point No break will occur even when the trace acquisition stops Trace stop due to trace buffer over
262. ree sheet is only available when Not trace the function call is not checked in the popup menu of the Profile window Double clicking a function in the Function column expands or reduces the tree structure display The expansion or reduction is also provided by the or key Double clicking the Address column displays the source program of the specific address Right clicking on the mouse within the window displays a popup menu Supported menu options are described in the following sections e View Source Displays the source program or disassembled memory contents for the address in the selected line e View Profile Chart Displays the Profile Chart window focused on the function in the specified line e Enable Profiler Toggles acquisition profile data When profile data acquisition is active a check mark is shown to the left of the menu text Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 75 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging e Not trace the function call Stops tracing function calls while profile data is acquired This menu is used when acquiring profile data of the program in which functions are called in a special way such as task switching in the OS To display the relation of function calls in the Tree sheet of the Profile window acquire profile data without selecting this menu In addition do not select this menu when optimizing the program by the optimizing linkage editor using the a
263. rface cable P20 P21 P23 P20 P21 P23 P34 to P37 gt P34 to P37 P63 to P67 P63 to P67 PAO to PA2 PAO to PA2 PIO to PIS PIO to PIS PJO to PJ7 VHC125 PJO to PJ7 PKO to PK7 PKO to PK7 o Sub MCU P20 P21 P23 P34 to P37 P63 to P67 PAO to PA2 PIO to PI3 PJO to PJ7 PKO to PK7 VCC User system MCU 47 KQ interface cable VHCT125 PFO to PF4 PFO to PF4 PF6 PF7 gt PF6 PF7 VHC125 lt 9 CB3Q3306 Sub MCU 9 PFO to PF4 PF6 PF7 VCC User system MCU interface cable VHCT125 47 KQ p22 D P22 VHC125 O CB3Q3306 LVC07 Sub MCU P22 RENESAS Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 5 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 23 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Hardware Specifications VCC User system MCU interface cable VHCT125 47 KQ PF5 PFS VHC125 e lt r CB3Q3306 o 3V CB3Q3306 iko LVC07 Sub MCU lt PF5 Figure 3 2 User System Interface Circuits 6 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 24 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 4 Support of the Target MCU 3 4 1 Memory Space The architecture of the MCU allows for a 16 Mbyte memory space 1 On Chip I O Area If an attempt is made to access the on chip I O area the on chip I O area in the MCU installed in the emulator is accessed To break user program execution when the on chip I O area is written to or accessed use th
264. rily stop trace acquisition during execution of the user program select Halt from the popup menu This stops trace acquisition and updates the trace display Use this method to check the trace information without stopping execution of the user program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 56 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 8 10 Restarting Trace Acquisition To restart trace acquisition being stopped during execution of the user program select Restart from the popup menu 3 8 11 Extracting Records from the Acquired Information Use the filtering function to extract the records you need from the acquired trace information The filtering function allows the trace information acquired by hardware to be filtered by software Unlike the settings made in the Trace Acquisition dialog box for acquiring trace information by conditions changing the settings for filtering several times to filter the acquired trace information allows easy extraction of necessary information which is useful for analysis of data The content of the trace buffer will not be changed even when the filtering function is used Acquiring useful information as much as possible by the Trace Acquisition settings improves the efficiency in analysis of data because the capacity of the trace buffer is limited Use the filtering function in the Trace Filter dialog box to select a range for filtering I x Area Status Probes IRQ Timestamp Gene
265. roperties dialog box so that an illegal access will cause a break Accesses to memory with the debugging function in use as in the Memory window are available regardless of the attribute that has been selected Note For details refer to section 5 3 Memory Map Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 18 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 2 Downloading a Program This section describes how to download a program and view it as source code or assembly language mnemonics Note After a break has occurred the Editor window displays the location of the present program counter PC In most cases for example if an Elf Dwarf2 based project is moved from its original path the source file may not be automatically found In this case a source file browser dialog box is displayed to allow you to manually locate the source file 3 2 1 Downloading a Program A load module to be debugged must be downloaded To download a program select the load module from Debug gt Download or select Download from the popup menu opened by clicking the right hand mouse button on the load module in Download modules of the Workspace window Note Before downloading a program it must be registered to the High performance Embedded Workshop as a load module 3 2 2 Viewing the Source Code To view a source file s code double click on its icon in the file tree or right click on the source file and select the Open option on the po
266. ror 20 ns error when the measurement resolution is 20 ns This error may occur when the user program execution starts or stops breaks or when the measurement start or end condition is satisfied e Frequency stability of the crystal oscillating module for performance analysis 0 01 5 9 2 Notes e Inall measurement modes the interval between the end condition satisfaction and the next start condition satisfaction must be longer than one measurement resolution time If the interval is shorter than that the interval itself is included in the measured time e In Time Of Specified Range Measurement measurement stops when an instruction is fetched outside the specified range In Start Point To End Point Measurement and Start Range To End Range Measurement measurement stops when the specified end condition is satisfied When the same addresses are specified for these modes the time measured in Time Of Specified Range Measurement is longer than that measured in Start Point To End Point Measurement or Start Range To End Range Measurement e Execution time is measured by using address bus values in prefetch cycles If the end address condition is specified at an address near the instruction following a branch instruction or delayed slot instruction correct time cannot be measured Check the bus trace display for the operation after the branch instruction prefetch cycle and specify the end address condition at the address in a prefetch cy
267. rted at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 34 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Description Test program start message x x shows the version number Shows that the PC interface board is correctly installed in the host computer Shows that the E6000H emulator is correctly connected to the host computer Shows the ID number of the E6000H emulator Shows the time when the diagnostic program was started up Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure x x k NORMAL TEST Press Q to stop COUNT 0001 1 Main Board Access 01y Registers Initial Value Check w 5 edeceewwwwemicciceee once A OK 02 Registers WEILS VOLLEY eid sc diced di scaace gop goggles ecececes a eeseswavaen 505050 EE OK 03 DPRAM Addr ss Decod TEBE ssresessess sr HSS Bod trr ars raisi SKIP 04 DERAM Marching Tast 3 2266 dcs sc c 0 oR i ii En aL Rarer add RES ESEE SKIP 05 Trace Memory Address Decode Test cece cee eee ee ee ween OK 06 Trace Memory Marching Test s 2 22280c sce aaa ot ente dadnoes gaa VE OK 07 C A Registers Initial Value Check serseriye es dented teeeeae ete OK 08 G A Registers Write Verify oicccseeaccccdeeeececcecceacae ce eee eer OK 2 Emulation Board Access 0I Registers Initial Value Check cccieneneices Os aeeaasie ag ecasen ees OK 02 Registers Write VeErity lt lt hnnendeeeeeees ohadaaaennnd RRRA ARAA OK 3 Evaluation Board Access OL Registers Initial Value
268. s of the probe signal is low Select the status of IRQ signals Detects no IRQ signal condition when this box is checked Detects the specified IRQ signal condition Don t care Detects no selected IRQ condition High The status of the IRQ signal is high Low The status of the IRQ signal is low Specify the time stamp value for bus cycles Detects no time stamp value when this box is checked Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 55 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging Setting Detects the specified time stamp value Enter a time stamp value Every field must be filled in Clicking the OK button after setting conditions in those pages stores the settings and starts searching Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without setting of conditions When a trace record that matches the search conditions is found the line for the trace record will be highlighted When no matching trace record is found a message dialog box will appear Only the trace information that satisfies all the conditions set in above pages will be searched If a find operation is successful selecting Find Next from the popup menu will move to the next found item 3 8 5 Clearing the Trace Information Select Clear from the popup menu to empty the trace buffer that stores the trace information If several Trace windows are open all Trace windows will be cleared as they all access the same buffer 3 8 6 Saving the
269. s were selected in the New Project Step 7 dialog box shown in figure 2 5 set the name of a configuration file for each of them each time clicking the Next button to proceed to the next target Setting of the configuration file name is the end of the emulator settings Click the Finish button to display the Summary dialog box Clicking the OK button activates the High performance Embedded Workshop 5 After the High performance Embedded Workshop has been activated the emulator is automatically connected The message Connected is displayed on the Debug tab in the Output window to indicate the completion of connection Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 6 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 2 Creating a New Workspace Toolchain Used 1 In the Welcome dialog box that is displayed when the High performance Embedded Workshop is activated select the Create a new project workspace radio button and click the OK button Cancel Administration z Browse to another project workspace Figure 2 6 Welcome Dialog Box 2 Creation of anew workspace is started The following dialog box is displayed ax Projects Workspace Name Application E Assembly Application sampe ED emonstration Pie mE Empty Application E Import Makefile sampe Dibra Directory CAH ew2 sample Browse CPU fa
270. sage Parallel Access Error appears on the Debug sheet of the Output window when a parallel access fails parallel accesses will be disabled until a break occurs If the parallel access function is not necessary or is not available clear Enable DTC parallel access in the Configuration Properties dialog box to avoid unnecessary accesses 5 5 Executing Your Program 5 5 1 Step Execution Break conditions are ignored during step execution but triggers will be output Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 143 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 6 Event Functions 5 6 1 Software Breakpoints e A software breakpoint is accomplished by replacing the instruction at the specified address with a special instruction Accordingly it can only be set to the RAM area including the emulation memory However it cannot be set to the following addresses An address whose memory content is H 5770 Areas other than the CS areas except for the on chip ROM and RAM areas e Do not modify the contents of the software breakpoints addresses by the user program e The content of a software breakpoint address is replaced by a break instruction during user program execution e The maximum number of software breakpoints and temporary PC breakpoints in Temporary PC Breakpoints of the Run Program dialog box is 255 in total Therefore when 255 software breakpoints have been set no
271. setPoint Delay Run time count between trigger outputs M Use Fromtts2 From3to4 From 5to6 From7to8 IV Free trace Back stop address H 00001048 ewes ae Figure 4 45 Trace Acquisition Properties Dialog Box Trace Stop 5 Select Reset Go from the Debug menu The trace condition is satisfied and the Trace window then displays the following contents alDixd rZieer iu PTR InstructionAddress Code Address VariableLabel Data R W SZ Status Area TASK Probes INQ Timestamp 2 00012 00001 1ac O100Gbal 3D L PROS EMJ 16 2111 1 0000h000nint 00011 OOtfbtec 00001040 BD L STACK INPAM 2111 1 0000h00 mint 00010 00900000 r 8 rme iore aii i 0000h000naint 00009 00001 1a6 RTS 00001040 Od01I7f RD L PROG RNO 16 ai 1 0000h000mint 00000 00001040 Mov 0 BL 00001044 4c0217b1 RD L PROG M9 16 nuu 1 0000h000minC 00007 00001042 EXTEL nal 00001040 Taibai RD L PROG Dei LERES i 0000h000mint 00006 0000104c OOffb400 RD L PROG EMJ 16 111 1 0000h000nint 00005 00001044 BoE ou 104028 00001048 Wa2thel BD L PROS ewD 16 1111 1 0000b000mint 00004 0000104e OOffh400 wD t Phos eno 16 LEESI 1 OO00hO00ma nl 00003 00901050 GhS27822 RD L PROG ENO 16 n 1 0000h000mint 00002 00001049 MNW L BRI QIN OOPPO40 00001054 O00a de4 RD L PROG BMJ 16 ini 2 0000h000mint 00003 00001050 Inc 1 R2 O0ff400 a O0OMic WR L DATA IPAM aii i 0000h000nant al Figure 4 46 Trace Window Trace Stop
272. sources From To Mapping Emulation RAM Module QOOO0000 OOOFFFFF Emulator Read write 4MB Emulation RAM fitted FD7FFF User Guarded Ram Bases OOFD8000 OOFDBFFF On Chip Guarded 0 count 1 at H O0000000 size H 100000 OOFDCOOO OOFF3FFF User Guarded 1 not used OOFF4000 OOFFFFFF On Chip Read write 2 not used 01000000 OFFFFFFF User Guarded 3 not used Target Device Configuration OOFDS000 OOFDBFFF Reserved Area OOFF6000 OOFFBFFF Internal RAM OOFFEAOO OOFFFEFF Internal 10 OOFFFF20 OOFFFFFF Internal 10 Figure 3 4 Memory Mapping Dialog Box Add Displays the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to modify the address range and attributes of a memory map Modify Displays the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box allowing the user to modify the address range and attributes of a memory map Reset Resets the map memory to its default settings Close Closes the dialog box The memory configuration of the target MCU being emulated is displayed by the Memory sheet in the Status window Note For details refer to section 5 3 Memory Map Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 17 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 1 5 Changing the Memory Map Setting Clicking the Add button on the Memory Mapping dialog box or clicking the Modify button after selecting the information on the memory map setting you want to change opens the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box
273. ss Control Mode PC Selection Static ae noes Time Measurement Unit 20ns Selection 2 Static Figure 3 39 Start Point To End Point Measurement Settings Range Name Point Start Address End Address Time Out Action Time Out The name of the range to be measured The range for the Start Point To End Point Measurement Address to start measurement Address to end measurement The action to take when a timeout or count out occurs Disable Disables setting of a timeout or count out value Enable Stops the user program execution when a timeout or count out occurs Trace Stop Stops trace acquisition when a timeout or count out occurs This is only available for channel 1 The timeout value to finish measurement When the minimum time for measurement is 160 ns 40 ns or 20 ns enter the value as follows Example 1h 2min 3s 123ms 456us 789ns If the CPU operating mode is target enter a hexadecimal number in 10 digits Example 123456789A A break occurs every time a value measured in the specified range exceeds the timeout value not the total time This is only available for channel 1 Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 68 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging Count The count up value used in measurement of the execution count A break occurs every time the execution count exceeds the count up value This is only available for channel 1 Measures the execut
274. st computer with the USB interface E6000H emulator co PCIF USB adapter Host computer USB cable PC interface cable Figure 1 7 System Configuration Using a USB Adapter Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 7 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 8 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 1 Description on Emulator Usage This section describes the preparation before emulator usage Figure 2 1 is a flowchart on preparation before use of the emulator CAUTION Read this section and understand its contents before preparation Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Connect the emulator Described in this section I Set up the emulator on each OS See the E6000H emulator setup guide Start debugging See the Debugger Part Figure 2 1 Emulator Preparation Flowchart Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 9 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 Emulator Connection 4 he following description covers connection of the emulator 2 2 1 Connecting the Emulator to the User System AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will dam
275. started up Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 32 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure x k NORMAL TEST Press Q to stop COUNT 0001 1 Main Board Access 01 Registers Initial Value Check OK 02 Registers Write Verify ssrarrirr acdc Snan EKKE KEDD OK 03 DPRAM Address Decode Test 2 2 02 eee SKIP Od DPRAM Marching Test aicciais ccd ee esees cbc Hees ee DES aE SKIP 05 Trace Memory Address Decode Test OK 06 Trace Memory Marching Test 2 22 eee eee eee OK 07 G A Registers Initial Value Check 2 OK 08 G A Registers Write Verify iis esses ce See ee ee eee ace atetes OK 2 Emulation Board Access 01 Registers Initial Value Check OK 02 Registers Write VerTIEYy occ is ci5 3 eee idad Oaeh pares aaa E OK 3 Evaluation Board Access 01 Registers Initial Value Check 2 OK 02 REGIBESrSs WEILE VEELEY oessa a enre EEE es Sle e neevepere OK 03 SHEUDT IDEME Cheek diroris rP PERNS ete eve AAAA OK 04 Firmware DOI sss6 s4 006e ees amp Seo HSH AIRES Re a OK 05 Configuration Set a4 4664546 440i bbb bee elsee ede Gane ae ae OK 4 Basic Function Diy GO tO BRESE occas eee kika ass eted eE ccc LEReEES tae neee OK 02 RESET GO lt 5 5 usa con eeeannm eae eae eee eae eee eae oles OK 03 STEP cs 5 5 be SESS SEER SEES SEES ere ce ce eS
276. stopped at WWW MMM DD hh mm ss YYYY Tests run for xh xmin xs Summary oO 0o oo ND Ae WNB Tests performed 1 time s Main Board Access 0 Error s Emulation Board Access 0 Error s Evaluation Board Access 0 Error sg Basic Function 0 Error s GO to BREAK Time Measurement 0 Error s Emulation Monitor 0 Error s G A Break Function 0 Erro 8 G A Performance Analysis Function 0 Error s G A Monitor Function 0 Error s G A Parallel RAM Monitor 0 Error s G A Trace Function 0 Error s Combination 0 Error s Parallel Access 0 Error s RENESAS Shows the time when diagnostic program execution ended Shows the execution time of the diagnostic program Shows the total number of errors for each test item Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 65 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 4 Repair Request Sheet Thank you for purchasing the H8SX E6000H emulator In the event of a malfunction fill in the repair request sheet on the following pages and send it to your distributor Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 66 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Repair Request Sheet To Distributor Your company name Person in charge Tel Item Symptom 1 Date and time when the malfunction occurred Month Day Year at system initiation in system operation Circle either item in the braces 2 Frequency of generation of the malfunction Enter
277. system power and then the emulator power The external clock source will then be automatically specified Emulator Internal Clock Specify 5 0 MHz or 6 0 MHz in the Configuration dialog box Reference When the emulator system program is initiated the emulator automatically selects the MCU clock source according to the following priority 1 User system s clock when an external clock is supplied from the user system 2 Crystal oscillator if one is mounted on the emulator s front end unit 3 Emulator internal clock Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 14 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 6 Connecting the System Ground CAUTION Separate the frame ground from the signal ground at the user system When the frame ground is connected to the signal ground and the emulator is then connected to the user system the emulator will malfunction The emulator s signal ground is connected to the user system s signal ground via the emulator s front end unit In the E6000H station the signal ground and frame ground are connected figure 2 4 At the user system connect the frame ground only do not connect the signal ground to the frame ground If it is difficult to separate the frame ground from the signal ground in the user system ground the frame to the same outlet as the 100 V to 240 V AC power supply of the emulator station figure 2 5 so that the ground potentials become even Sign
278. t Functions Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 34 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 7 1 Setting a Software Breakpoint Use the Software sheet on the Event window to display change or add settings for software breakpoints Select Add or Edit from the popup menu displayed on the Software sheet The Breakpoint Properties dialog box the Software Break page will appear Breakpoint Properties ZAR EVs Count 1 address H 00001000 Figure 3 20 Breakpoint Properties Dialog Box Software Break Page Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 35 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging To add a new software breakpoint select an empty line from the list box on the Software Break page and click the Edit button To change existing settings select the software breakpoint that you want to change from the list box and click the Edit button The Software Break dialog box is displayed H 00001000 Figure 3 21 Software Dialog Box Address Page Specify the breakpoint s address in the Address edit box and click the OK button Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 36 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 7 2 Setting an On Chip Breakpoint Use the On Chip sheet on the Event window to display change or add settings for on chip breakpoints Select Add or Edit from the popup menu displayed on the
279. t hand mouse button on the Profile window to show the popup menu and select Enable Profiler Profile lt Ena Show Functions Variables JE oa Puction Wordle View Source View Profile Ghart Enable Profiler Not trace the function call Setting r Properties Find Clear Data Output Profile Information Files Output Text File jv Toolbar display Customize toolbar Allow Docking Hide Dist Tree Figure 4 63 Selecting Enable Profiler Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 131 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial 3 Set an on chip breakpoint by an address condition at the line which includes delete p_sam in the tutorial function see section 4 16 2 On Chip Break Function a Sa 24 void main void 25 26 while 1 27 000102a tutoriali 28 29 30 aL 000102e void tutorial void 32 33 long j 34 int i si class Sample p_sam 36 sf 0001032 p_sam new Sample 38 0001050 for i O i lt 10 i 39 000103 j rand 40 0001044 12ta lt O f 41 0001046 aE 42 43 0001048 ali j 44 45 0001058 p_sam gt sort a 46 0001066 gt p_sam gt change a 47 48 000106e p_sam gt sO a O 49 0001072 p_sam gt sl a 1 50 0001076 p_sam gt s2 a 2 Si 000107a p_sam gt s3 a 3 52 000107e p_sam gt s4 a 4 53 0001086 p_sam gt s5 a 5 54 000108e p_sam gt s6 a 6 55 0001096 p_sam gt s7 a 7 56 000109e p_sam
280. temporary breakpoint set in Temporary PC Breakpoints of the Run Program dialog box is valid Ensure that the total number of software breakpoints and temporary PC breakpoints is 255 or less e The Go To Cursor function which can be selected from the Debug menu or the popup menu after the mouse cursor is positioned on the target address in the Editor window is implemented by a software breakpoint Accordingly when 255 software breakpoints have been set this function is not available e Do not set a breakpoint immediately after a delayed branch instruction at a slot instruction If this is attempted a slot illegal instruction interrupt will occur when the delayed branch instruction is executed and the break will not occur 5 6 2 On Chip Break e The satisfaction count can only be set for channel 4 e A data bus condition can only be set for channel 4 e The address and data conditions are satisfied on the bus cycles where the values on the address bus or data bus match Consider the following points when setting these conditions Longword access Longword data is read and written in a single bus cycle A data condition is only valid for a longword access when specified as longword When a specified address is not a multiple of four 4n several cycles will be generated as shown in tables 5 4 and 5 5 Set address and data conditions according to these tables Note that longword data is only valid as the size of an access Word acc
281. ter connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 2 Preparation before Use Supply power to the emulator and connected parts after connecting all cables Cables must not be connected or removed while the power is on For details on differences between the target MCU and the emulator refer to section 3 4 Support of the Target MCU Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 1 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview 1 2 Emulator Hardware Components The emulator consists of an E6000H station and an evaluation chip board By installing a user system interface board option on your host computer the emulator can be connected in the same package as the device PC interface option includes a PC interface board PCI bus and PC card bus a LAN adapter connected with the network and a USB adapter connected with the USB interface By connecting the emulator to the host computer via those interfaces the High performance Embedded Workshop can be used for debugging For details on the PC interface boards available for PCI bus and PC card bus specifications the LAN adapter and the USB adapter refer to the relevant descriptive documents USB cable USB adapter option option 1 k pC PC interface PC interface cable cable option option e Network LAN adapter option A _ PC interface board option cA a Evaluation chip board User
282. ter is currently at the selected line of the sort function and that the sort function is called from the tutorial function To delete the software breakpoint double click the S W Breakpoints column in the sort function again Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 126 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 19 Performance Analysis Function Performance analysis by the emulator is available in the following modes e Time Of Specified Range Measurement e Start Point To End Point Measurement e Start Range To End Range Measurement e Access Count Of Specified Range Measurement e Called Count Of Specified Range Measurement In this tutorial we describe the Time Of Specified Range Measurement 4 19 1 Time Of Specified Range Measurement 1 Select Performance Analysis from the Performance submenu of the View menu to display the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box erFormance An Performance Analysis E6000H Performance Analysis Figure 4 56 Select Performance Analysis Type Dialog Box 2 Select E6000H Performance Analysis from the Performance Analysis combo box in the Select Performance Analysis Type dialog box and click the OK button The Performance Analysis window will be displayed RUN TIME MAX MIN TIME Beet One Oe oe Oa Figure 4 57 Performance Analysis Window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 127 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100
283. ters following the number Host interface PCI interface board HS6000EIC01H or HS6000EIC02H PC card interface HS6000EIP01H LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H Circle either item in the braces Serial No Revision These are impressed on the circuit board Provided CD R HS1650EPH60SR Version V Shown as V x xxrx on the CD R x numeral Host computer in use Manufacturer Type number OS Windows 98SE Windows Me Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Type number Circle either item in the braces Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 39 of 40 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure Item Symptom 4 Settings when the malfunction occurred Enter the operational settings of the emulator 1 Operating mode 2 Voltage of the target system Vv 3 Clock selection Emulator clock Xtal oscillator or external clock Circle one item above 4 Operating frequency MHz 5 Failure phenomenon 6 Error in debugging 7 Error detected by the diagnostic program 8 Connection between the High performance Embedded Workshop and the emulator has not been established Content of the error message For errors other than the above fill in the box below Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 40 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Debugger Part Section 1 Overview Sect
284. tes H x0E_F000 LB13 256 bytes to 4 kbytes LB14 128 bytes SB15 64 kbytes xO ee H xFF_FFOO H xFF_FF80 H xFF_FEFF _ B15 128 bytes LB Large block SB Small block Figure 5 1 Blocks Divided in 16 Mbyte Mode Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 141 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 5 Software Specifications and Notes Specific to This Product 5 4 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory 5 4 1 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory during Execution The emulator accesses memory in the following two ways to display and modify the contents of memory during user program execution Table 5 2 Access Types for Displaying and Modifying Contents of Memory Period Access Type Description Suspended Display Modification Monitor function Automatically updates the display of the None Enabled Disabled memory contents without stopping the user program execution If the specified range is not accessed the contents of memory will not be updated Parallel access Temporarily halts the user program 51 bus cycles Enabled Enabled function execution When updating a forced memory are required access occurs and realtime emulation will for a 4 byte not be performed access These access types have the following characteristics Table 5 3 Characteristics of Displaying and Modifying Contents of Memory Access Type Target Window Target Memory Area Monitor function Realtime update of
285. test in the E6000H emulation board 3 Evaluation Board Access Register test in the E6000H s front end unit 4 Basic Function Test of the basic functions 5 GO to BREAK Time Measurement Test of the execution time measurement function Emulation Monitor Test of the emulation monitor G A Break Function Test of the G A break function 8 G A Performance Analysis Function Test of the G A performance measurement function 9 G A Monitor Function Test of the G A monitoring function 10 G A Parallel RAM Monitor Test of the G A parallel RAM monitoring function 11 G A Trace Function Test of the G A trace function 12 Combination Test of several functions in combination 13 Parallel Access Test of the parallel access function 14 H8SX 1544 Register Read Write Test of registers in the SUB MCU 15 FPGA Parallel RAM Function Test of the FPGA s parallel RAM monitoring function Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 32 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 3 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program Insert the CD R HS 1650EPH60SR supplied with the emulator into the CD ROM drive of the host computer use the command prompt to change the current directory to lt Drive gt Diag 1544 and enter the command below that corresponds to the PC interface board used to initiate the diagnostic program 1 PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EIC02H gt TM1544 PCI Enter 2 PC card interface HS6000EIPO1H gt TM
286. that the power LED is not lit 2 Connect the user system interface cable to the user system and supply a clock signal through the EXTAL pin from the user system 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power The external clock source will then be automatically specified Emulator Internal Clock Specify 4 0 MHz or 5 0 MHz in the Configuration dialog box Reference When the emulator system program is initiated the emulator automatically selects the MCU clock source according to the following priority 1 User system s clock when an external clock is supplied from the user system 2 Crystal oscillator if one is mounted on the emulator s front end unit 3 Emulator internal clock Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 14 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use 2 2 6 Connecting the System Ground CAUTION Separate the frame ground from the signal ground at the user system When the frame ground is connected to the signal ground and the emulator is then connected to the user system the emulator will malfunction The emulator s signal ground is connected to the user system s signal ground via the emulator s front end unit In the E6000H station the signal ground and frame ground are connected figure 2 4 At the user system connect the frame ground only do not connect the signal ground to the frame ground If it is difficult to separate the frame ground from the signal grou
287. the Close button on the Breakpoint Properties dialog box Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 107 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial The software breakpoint that has been set is displayed in the Event window zaxi D 2 X Type Software Enable PC 0000106E Tutorial cpp 48 Break AE software On chip A On Emulator 7 Figure 4 35 Event Window Software Breakpoint Setting Note The items that can be displayed in this window differ depending on the product For the items that can be displayed refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help e Close the Event window e To stop the tutorial program at the breakpoint select Reset Go from the Debug menu Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 108 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial The program runs until it stops at the breakpoint that has been set 24 25 26 27 000102a 28 29 30 e e A 000102e 32 33 34 35 36 on 0001032 38 0001050 39 000103c 40 0001044 41 0001046 42 49 0001048 44 45 0001058 46 0001066 47 48 000106e 49 0001072 50 0001076 Si 000107a 52 000107e 53 0001086 54 000108e 55 0001096 56 000109e 57 00010a6 58 00010ae 59 4 Tutorial cpp void main void while 1 tutorial void tutorial void long j int i class Sample p_sam p_sam new Sample for i O i lt 10 i j rand if 3 lt li j J ali j
288. the Register window Memory Ctrl M E Opens the Memory window IO Ctrl I Fl Opens the IO window Status Ctrl U T Opens the Status window Extended Monitor a Opens the Extended Monitor window Monitor Monitor Shift o Opens the Monitor window Setting Ctrl E Windows Opens the Windows Select Select dialog box to list add or edit the Monitor window Sym Labels Shift Opens the Labels window bol Ctrl A Watch Ctrl W E Opens the Watch window Locals Shift al Opens the Locals window Ctrl W Code Eventpoints Ctrl E E Opens the Event window Trace Ctrl T Opens the Trace window Code Coverage Shift m Opens the Code Coverage Ctrl H window Data coverage Shift EA Opens the Data Coverage Ctrl Z window Stack Trace Ctrl K E Opens the Stack Trace window RENESAS Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 157 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 Appendix A Menus Table A 1 GUI Menus cont Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Button Remarks View Gra Image cont phic Shift Ctrl G Opens the Image window Waveform Shift Ctrl V Opens the Waveform window Per Performance form Analysis ance Shift Ctrl P Opens the Performance Analysis window Profile Shift Ctrl F Opens the Profile window Menu Option Shortcut Toolbar Button Remarks Debug Debug Sessions Opens th
289. the satisfaction count can be specified differ depending on the product For details on each product refer to section 3 Debugging or the online help e Select Eventpoints from the Code submenu of the View menu or click the Eventpoints toolbar button B The Event window is displayed e The software breakpoint that has been previously set must be deleted Click the Software sheet of the Event window with the right hand mouse button and select Delete All from the popup menu to delete all the software breakpoints that have been set e Click the On Chip tab of the Event window e Click the Event window with the right hand mouse button and select Add from the popup menu e The Breakpoint Properties dialog box On Chip Break page is displayed Breakpoint Properties 2 x Software Break On Chip Break On Emulator Break Sequential Break Bi gow Count Run time count between trigger outputs I From4to3 Back wn Reset Reset All Apply Figure 4 38 Breakpoint Properties Dialog Box On Chip Break Page e Select 4 in the list box and click the Edit button The On Chip Break Channel 4 dialog box is displayed Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 111 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Tutorial e Make the following settings in the group boxes on the Address page Uncheck the Don t Care checkbox Then use the Editor window to refer to t
290. ties dialog box Configuration Properties General User Signals Ht 163 MD CLK O I Custom Device enable User Reset enable V User NMI enable Mode 7 SineleChip zl IV User Standby enable Clock frame z IV User Bus Request Wait enable Timer Resolution 20ns 7 Bus Timegut 100us E Device J Enable interrupts during step execution User IRQ enable firt IV Break on access error J Enable multi break J Enable internal ROM area write J Enable SDRAM interface MD3 IV Enable DTC parallel access User WCC Threshold 2 90 KI T gt Driver Emulator PCI Gard Driver J Change driver in start up Caen Figure 3 1 Configuration Properties Dialog Box General Page Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 13 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging General page Device Selects the target MCU to be emulated See the hardware manual for details Custom Device enable Customizes the target MCU Checking this box allows the user to make settings on the Custom Device page Mode Selects the operating mode of the target MCU Clock Selects the speed of the input clock of the target MCU Timer Resolution Selects the resolution of the timer for use in execution time measurement and performance analysis Select one of the following values Execution time measurement 52us 1 6us or 20ns Performance analysis CLOCK CLO
291. tor to excessive vibration Refer to section 3 1 Environmental Conditions Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses Before using the emulator s power supply check its specifications such as power voltage and frequency When moving the emulator take care not to subject it to strong vibration or mechanical shock After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 2 Preparation before Use Supply power to the emulator and connected parts after connecting all cables Cables must not be connected or removed while the power is on For details on differences between the target MCU and the emulator refer to section 3 4 Support of the Target MCU Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 1 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview 1 2 Emulator Hardware Components The emulator consists of an E6000H station and the E6000H s front end unit By installing a user system interface cable option to your host computer the emulator can be connected in the same package as the device PC interface option includes a PC interface board PCI bus and PC card bus a LAN adapter connected with the network and a USB adapter connected with the USB interface By connecting the emulator to the host computer via those interfaces the High performance Embedded Workshop can be used for debugging For details on the PC interface boards available for PCI bus and PC card bus specifi
292. upplied with the emulator into the CD ROM drive of the host computer use the command prompt to change the current directory to lt Drive gt Diag 1527R and enter the command below that corresponds to the PC interface board used to initiate the diagnostic program 1 PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EIC02H gt TM1527R PCI Enter 2 PC card interface HS6000EIP01H gt TM1527R PCCD Enter 3 LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H gt TM1527R ELN Enter 4 USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H gt TM1527R USB Enter The High performance Embedded Workshop must be installed before the test program is executed Be sure to initiate the diagnostic program from lt Drive gt Diag 1527R Do not initiate it from a directory other than lt Drive gt Diag 1527R such as gt lt Drive gt Diag 1527R TM1527R PCI Enter If the diagnostic program is initiated when the current directory is not lt Drive gt Diag 1527R the diagnostic program will not operate correctly When S is added to the command line as in gt TM1527R PCI S Enter steps 1 to 15 will be repeatedly executed To stop execution in this case enter Q Notes 1 lt Drive gt is the drive name of the CD ROM drive 2 Do not remove the CD R from the CD ROM drive during execution of the test program Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 37 of 44 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure The following messages are displayed during the test
293. ut signals are fixed high for pins where the setting of the ICR register has been cleared to 0 If the pin is used as an input for a peripheral module the corresponding ICR bit should be set to 1 On the emulator however the input buffer is always enabled regardless of the settings of the corresponding bits in the ICR register for the following peripheral modules When using any of these modules ensure that the user program has set the ICR bit for the corresponding peripheral module to 1 Peripheral modules that apply SSU and RCAN Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 28 of 40 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Hardware Specifications 3 5 7 Watch Timer WAT Restriction In the emulator resetting the WDT initializes the WAT registers In the actual MCU the WAT registers are not initialized 3 5 8 Port Function Control Register 4 PFCR4 Note In the emulator the value of PFCR4 is H 1F in the on chip ROM disabled mode and A23 to A21 are not output as addresses In the MCU however the value of PFCR4 is H FF in the on chip ROM disabled mode To use A23 to A21 in the emulator the user program must write the value H FF to address H FFFFFBC4 3 5 9 Access to the Internal RAM Note In the emulator writing to the internal RAM takes one cycle by default To make the emulator write data to the RAM in two cycles the user program must write the value H 35 to address H FFFFFD97 before any RAM access After that the RAM shou
294. utes user program 43 GO_RESET GR Executes user program from reset vector 44 GO_TILL GT Executes user program until temporary breakpoint 45 HALT HA Halts the user program 46 HELP HE Displays the command line help 47 INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform 48 LOG LO Controls command output logging 49 MAP_DISPLAY MA Displays memory mapping 50 MAP_SET MS Sets memory mapping 51 MEMORY_COMPARE MC Compares memory contents 52 MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents 53 MEMORY_EDIT ME Modifies memory contents 54 MEMORY FILL MF Modifies the content of a memory area by specifying data 55 MEMORY FIND MI Searches for data within the memory range 56 MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves a block of memory 57 MEMORY_TEST MT Tests a block of memory 58 MODE MO Sets or displays the MCU mode 59 MONITOR_CLEAR MOC Deletes a monitor point 60 MONITOR_DISPLAY MOD Displays the content of the monitor 61 MONITOR_REFRESH MOR Controls an automatic update of the content of the monitor 62 MONITOR_SET MOS Sets or displays a monitor point 63 OPEN_WORKSPACE Ow Opens a workspace 64 PROFILE PR Enables or disables the profile 65 PROFILE_DISPLAY PD Displays profiling results 66 PROFILE_SAVE PS Saves profiling results 67 QUIT QU Exits High performance Embedded Workshop 68 RADIX RA Sets default input radix Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 163 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Appendix B Command Lines Table B 1 High performance Embedded Workshop Commands cont No Command Name A
295. utorial e Tutorial Ey C source file DBSCT C SBRK C E C source file RESETPRG CPP SORT CPP Bp iacr amp Download modules H Tutorial abs E Dependencies 27 000102a 31 000102e 37 0001032 38 0001050 39 000103c 40 0001044 41 0001046 43 0001048 45 0001058 46 0001066 48 000106e 49 0001072 50 0001076 51 000107a 52 000107e 53 0001086 54 000108e 55 0001096 56 000109e 57 00010a6 58 00010ae void main void while 1 tutorial void tutorial void long j int i class Sample p sam p_sam new Sample for i O i lt 10 i j rand E 5 lt Oyi Jaa ali j p_sam gt sort a p_sam gt change a p_sam gt s0 a 0 p_sam gt si a 1 p_sam gt s2 a 2 p_sam gt s3 a 3 p_sam gt s4 a 4 p_sam gt s5 a 5 p_sam gt s6 a 6 p_sam gt s7 a 7 p_sam gt s8 a 8 p_sam gt s9 a 9 delete p_sam lt gt Tutorial cpp Figure 4 6 Editor Window Setting a Software Breakpoint The symbol e will appear on the line containing the sort function This shows that a software breakpoint has been set Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 88 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 6 Setting Registers Set a value in the program counter before executing the program e Select Registers from the CPU submenu of the View menu or click the Register tool
296. valuation chip board a 3 Side view of evaluation chip board Figure 1 4 Evaluation Chip Board a Station to evaluation chip board This is a cover for protecting the connector that connects interface connector cover the E6000H station to the evaluation chip board b Crystal oscillator terminals For installing a crystal oscillator to be used as an external clock source for the MCU c HS1650PWB20H board Connector to the trace cable is attached d HS1650PWB30H board An evaluation chip is installed and a dedicated connector to the user system interface board or user system is attached e User system interface board connector For connecting the user system interface board or user system Note a to e listed above are referred to as evaluation chip board Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 5 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 1 Overview 1 3 System Configuration The emulator must be connected to a host computer via the selected PC interface board PCI bus or PC card bus LAN adapter or USB adapter For details on the PC interface boards available for PCI bus and PC card bus specifications the LAN adapter and the USB adapter refer to the relevant descriptive documents 1 3 1 System Configuration Using Various Interfaces 1 PC Interface Board Figure 1 5 shows the configuration of a system in which the PC interface board is used The emulator can be connected to a host computer via a PC interface b
297. wer side of the board from lifting off the connector Alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the board Note This evaluation chip board can only be used in combination with the specified dedicated connectors WD 200P VF85 N Install the connectors WD 200P VF85 N manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd on the user system to connect the emulator Figures 2 2 to 2 4 show connection using the dedicated connector size restrictions for the installed components and the location for mounting the connector in the user system respectively Evaluation chip board Connector WD 200P VF85 N manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd Figure 2 2 Connection Using the Dedicated Connectors Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 11 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 2 Preparation before Use Evaluation chip board Unit mm Connector WD 200P VF85 N Tolerance 1 0 mm User system manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd Figure 2 3 Size Restrictions for the Installed Components 95 0 Hole for a connector NTH x 4 Unit mm WD 200P VF85 N Tolerance 0 1 mm Figure 2 4 Location for Mounting the Connector in the User System To design the foot pattern refer to the catalog on WD 200P VF85 N for dimensions Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 12 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use
298. x allows the user to set the items to be displayed in the Extended Monitor window Note help The items that can be set in this window depend on the emulator in use For details refer to the online Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 26 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 5 Displaying Memory Contents in Realtime Use the Monitor window to monitor the memory contents during user program execution In the Monitor function the realtime operation is retained since the bus monitoring circuit of the emulator sets the read write signal of the MCU as a trigger and holds the address bus and data bus values to update the displayed contents of the memory Up to eight points or 256 bytes in total can be set by using the eight monitoring channels on the bus monitoring circuit It is possible that a part or all of monitoring ranges is overlapped Notes 1 Monitoring is impossible for an area such as an on chip timer counter where no internal write signal is generated to update a value 2 The procedure to display or modify the contents of memory differs depending on the product If the display of memory contents is updated during execution of the user program realtime emulation may not be available For details refer to section 5 4 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory 3 5 1 Opening the Monitor Window To open the Monitor window select View gt CPU gt Monitor gt Monitor Setting or click th
299. y implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of any third party or Renesas Figures Some figures in this user s manual may show items different from your actual system Limited Anticipation of Danger Renesas cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard The warnings in this user s manual and on the emulator product are therefore not all inclusive Therefore you must use the emulator product safely at your own risk Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page Ill of VIII RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 SAFETY PAGE READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product e KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism DEFINITION OF SIGNAL WORDS A This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
300. ysis Function Test of the G A performance measurement function 9 G A Monitor Function Test of the G A monitoring function 10 G A Parallel RAM Monitor Test of the G A parallel RAM monitoring function 11 G A Trace Function Test of the G A trace function 12 Combination Test of several functions in combination 13 Parallel Access Test of the parallel access function 14 H8SX 1527 Register Read Write Test of registers in the SUB MCU 15 FPGA Parallel RAM Function Test of the FPGA s parallel RAM monitoring function Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 30 of 44 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 4 3 Diagnostic Test Procedure Using the Diagnostic Program Insert the CD R HS1650EPH6O0SR supplied with the emulator into the CD ROM drive of the host computer use the command prompt to change the current directory to lt Drive gt Diag 1527 and enter the command below that corresponds to the PC interface board used to initiate the diagnostic program 1 PCI bus interface board HS6000EICO1H or HS6000EIC02H gt TM1527 PCI Enter 2 PC card interface HS6000EIP01H gt TM1527 PCCD Enter 3 LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H gt TM1527 ELN Enter 4 USB adapter HS6000EIU01H or HS6000EIU02H gt TM1527 USB Enter The High performance Embedded Workshop must be installed before the test program is executed Be sure to initiate the diagnostic program from lt Drive gt Diag 1527 Do not initiate it from a directory other t
301. ystem or the signal output from the target MCU in the emulator by using the emulator s hardware circuit 3 4 1 Opening the Extended Monitor Window Selecting View gt CPU gt Extended Monitor or clicking the Extended Monitor toolbar button E displays this window The interval of updating the display is approximately 1 000 ms during user program execution or 5 000 ms while breaking respectively Extended Monitor i lol x Item Value ey item vate User Inactive User Breq or Wait Inactive User Standby Inactive User Vcc Ignore User Target Not Connected Sub Chip Board Not Connected Running status Break Software Break Trace Count 0 Trace Timestamp OverFlow None Target Mode Ignore Target Clock Ignore Figure 3 12 Extended Monitor Window Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 25 of 166 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 3 Debugging 3 4 2 Selecting Items to be Displayed Selecting Properties from the popup menu displays the Extended Monitor Configuration dialog box Extended Monitor Configuration Update millsecond Running 1000 Break 5000 Settings User Reset User NMI User Breg or Wait User Standby User VCC User Target Sub Chip Board Running status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Ignore Not Connected Not Connected Break Ready Figure 3 13 Extended Monitor Configuration Dialog Box This dialog bo
302. z H8SX 1664R Xtal Crystal oscillator 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1668R H8SX 1653R H8SX 1654R H8SX 1658R H8SX 1650 12 Emulator clock 12 MHz 16 Emulator clock 16 MHz H 1657 penile Target External clock 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1651 Xtal Crystal oscillator 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1650C H8SX 1642 8 Emulator clock 8 MHz 12 Emulator clock 12 MHz H 1644 B519 12 5 Emulator clock 12 5 MHz H8SX 1648 Target External clock 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1632 Xtal Crystal oscillator 8 to 18 MHz H8SX 1634 H8SX 1638 Crystal Oscillator A crystal oscillator is not supplied with the emulator Prepare and use one that has the same frequency as that of the user system When using a crystal oscillator as the MCU clock source the frequency range must be as shown in table 2 2 CAUTION Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting the CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR Otherwise the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 24 of 68 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 2 Preparation before Use Follow the procedure listed below to install the crystal oscillator 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Check that the power LED is not lit N Attach the crystal oscillator into the terminals on the evaluation chip board figure 2 6 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power The crystal oscillator will then be automatically set and started up This function will
303. z MPU 12Mhz Sampling 1 6us OK 04 EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling 52us 2 OK Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 63 of 68 RENESAS REJ10J1130 1100 Section 4 Diagnostic Test Procedure 10 il 12 13 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 1LF EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 0 OK EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 2 OK EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 4 2 2 OK EMU 12Mhz MPU 12Mhz Sampling MPU 8 OK EMU 12Mhz MPU 48Mhz Sampling 20ns OK EMU 4Mhz MPU 32Mhz Sampling 20ns OK EMU 35 7Mhz MPU 35 7Mhz Sampling 20ns OK EMU 35 9Mhz MPU 35 9Mhz Sampling 20ns OK EMU 1Mhz MPU f 2Mhz Sampling 20ns SKIP Emulation Monitor 01 RESERVED 02 RESERVED 03 ASEST 6202 5c eer sc cscs cee se ee TERETE REGS ROR BE ERE Bas eles OK G A Break Function O01 AdAFess CONGLETON 03 56 Soe A aRS Oe ERO EEELERERS RR ROS OK 02 Data Condition osseete EErEE UEO UO ee RES OK 03 Control Signal Condition ASEDSHH HL LH HL OK 04 Function Code Condition ASEST3 0 sc cce die eee os idee kes OK 05 RESERVED 06 Control Signal Condition CB22 19 OK 07 Control Signal Condition CB18 16 OK G A Performance Analysis Function 01 Time Measurement 20ns Samp
304. zation using the profile information refer to the manual of the optimizing linkage editor e Expands Size Expands spaces between each function The key can also be used to expand spaces e Reduces Size Reduces spaces between each function The key can also be used to reduce spaces Rev 11 00 Jan 28 2009 Page 78 of 166 REJ10J1130 1100 RENESAS Section 3 Debugging 3 12 RTOS Extension Function The RTOS extension function supports the debugging of RTOS tasks The function is implemented by setting the IDs of RTOS tasks at particular addresses This extends the following emulator functions e Step operation e Tracing e Performance analysis e On emulator break 3 12 1 RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties Dialog Box Select Option gt Emulator gt RTOS Support Function or click the RTOS Support Function toolbar button RD This opens the RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties dialog box Setting this dialog box for a task makes the extended functions applicable to that task port Function Configuration Properties 2 x General RTOS Support Function T Don t Care TASK ID writing area HOOFFFBES Setting m TASK Selection I Don t Care IZ TASK Selection1 Task D10 IZ TASK Selection2 os v Do I TASK Selection 3 Task z p m TASK STEP IV Enable Figure 3 46 RTOS Support Function Configuration Properties Dialog Box

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  GLS 2500 G GLS 2500 VA  Samsung CS-21S8MH دليل المستخدم  取扱説明書    JF INSTRUMENTS MGC Series  JIS B 6607: Safety standards for construction of band saw machines  User Manual - B&H Photo Video Digital Cameras, Photography  Manual de Instalação e Operação  CardioMap® Guide d`installation  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file